WO2021057389A1 - 一种双连接管理方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

一种双连接管理方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021057389A1
WO2021057389A1 PCT/CN2020/112296 CN2020112296W WO2021057389A1 WO 2021057389 A1 WO2021057389 A1 WO 2021057389A1 CN 2020112296 W CN2020112296 W CN 2020112296W WO 2021057389 A1 WO2021057389 A1 WO 2021057389A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network device
terminal device
message
radio bearer
dual
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2020/112296
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
常俊仁
李记锋
冯淑兰
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP20868096.7A priority Critical patent/EP4027746B1/en
Publication of WO2021057389A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021057389A1/zh
Priority to US17/704,538 priority patent/US12108474B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/30—Connection release
    • H04W76/34—Selective release of ongoing connections
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0023—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the signalling
    • H04L1/0025—Transmission of mode-switching indication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/15—Setup of multiple wireless link connections

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and in particular to a dual-connection management method and communication device.
  • the terminal device can establish a communication connection with the main network device and the auxiliary network device at the same time, and realize data transmission with the core network through the main network device and the auxiliary network device.
  • the dual connection needs to be temporarily interrupted for a period of time.
  • the terminal device is a dual-card device
  • the secondary card needs to perform certain services, it needs to deactivate the dual-connection of the primary card (it can also be described as the suspension of the dual-connection), and wait for the secondary card's service After the execution is complete, reactivate the dual link of the main card (it can also be described as the restoration of dual link).
  • the primary network device controls the release and establishment of the communication connection between the terminal device and the secondary network device through a radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) reconfiguration message to complete the deactivation or activation of the dual connection.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the terminal device Due to the large delay in the release and re-establishment of the communication connection between the terminal device and the auxiliary network device, the terminal device cannot quickly deactivate or activate the dual connection, which also causes the dual connection to be deactivated. Suspended services cannot be quickly resumed and executed. Therefore, how to improve the efficiency of activation and deactivation of the dual connection and how to ensure the continuous execution of the service under the dual connection has become one of the technical problems to be solved urgently.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a dual-connection management method and communication device.
  • the efficiency of activation and deactivation of the dual connection can be improved, the continuity of the communication service under the dual connection is ensured, and the applicability and practicability of the dual connection technology are improved.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a dual connection management method.
  • the method is suitable for terminal equipment, which communicates with the first network equipment and the second network equipment in a dual connection.
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the first network device.
  • the first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device deactivates or suspends the dual connection.
  • the terminal device can actively request or indicate to the first network device that it needs to deactivate (also known as suspend) or activate (also known as resume) of the dual connection, and when it deactivates the dual connection
  • the RRC connection or wireless link established with the second network device will not be released, which can ensure that it can activate dual connectivity more quickly, which can improve the efficiency of dual connectivity activation or deactivation, thereby improving the performance of dual connectivity technology Applicability and practicality.
  • the terminal device receives a second message from the first network device or the second network device, and performs dual connection deactivation or deactivation according to the second message.
  • the first message is sent to the first network device to request the first network device to confirm whether the dual connection can be deactivated, which can avoid unnecessary dual-connection deactivation caused by misjudgment by the terminal device, and can improve the terminal device’s Business continuity under dual connectivity.
  • the foregoing second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first set of secondary cells. Or the above indication information is used to indicate to suspend the connection with the first secondary cell set.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the terminal device maintains the radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the second network device connection.
  • the terminal device maintains the RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnects the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the terminal device suspends or stops communication via the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the terminal device suspends communication with the first secondary cell, it still saves the communication resources occupied by the RRC connection or wireless link established between the first secondary cell and the second network device, so that the terminal device There is no need to re-divide communication resources in the subsequent activation process of the dual connection, which can improve the deactivation and activation efficiency of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device sets the primary channel corresponding to the first radio bearer as the primary cell group MCG, and/or the terminal device modifies the uplink data separation threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the first threshold to the second threshold .
  • the second threshold is greater than the first threshold.
  • the terminal device suspends communication with the first secondary cell, and keeps monitoring the RLM of the radio link of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell, where the first secondary cell is connected to the second secondary cell.
  • the secondary cell where network equipment communicates.
  • the terminal device saves the data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device saves the configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device determines a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the terminal device determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer with a first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped target communication service with the second network device, and the target communication
  • the service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the suspended communication service between the terminal device and the second network device can be continued by the terminal device through the second radio bearer, which ensures the service continuity of the communication service and improves the applicability and practicability of the dual connection technology.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the terminal device determines the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the terminal device suspends or stops communication between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the terminal device transmits communication with the first radio bearer through the second radio bearer.
  • the terminal device suspends or stops communication with the first secondary cell on the first link.
  • the terminal device suspends communication with the second network device on the first link through the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device only suspends the communication on the uplink or the downlink, which can ensure that the transmission of some key information between the terminal device and the second network device will not be suspended, thereby reducing the deactivation of the dual connection on the terminal device.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the terminal device sends first auxiliary information to the first network device or the second network device, and the first auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: request The configured bearer type, the preferably configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, the configuration priority of different bearer types, and the duration of the dual connection interruption.
  • the terminal device can request the first network device to configure a more suitable radio bearer for it through the above-mentioned first auxiliary information, which can avoid the problem of the ability of the terminal device being reduced due to the unreasonable radio bearer configured by the first network device.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer.
  • the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the terminal device receives third auxiliary information sent by the first network device or the second network device, and uses the third auxiliary information to perform the The radio bearer configuration in the dual connectivity mode, wherein the third auxiliary information is used by the first network device or the second network device according to the multiple priority information, the one or more radio bearer type information, and Any one of the identification information of the one or more radio bearers is determined.
  • the terminal device sends second auxiliary information to the first network device, and the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: the reason for deactivation or suspension , The duration of deactivation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is the communication service that triggers the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection, and the service duration of the trigger service.
  • sending the first auxiliary information for the first network device can enable the first network device to more accurately determine whether the terminal device needs to be deactivated for dual connectivity.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station. or.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a main base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension of the secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension. Start the second network device.
  • the terminal device sends a third message to the first network device, where the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the terminal device receives a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the dual connection according to the fourth message.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the RRC connection with the second network device; or, restores the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the terminal device resumes communication through the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the terminal device restores the main channel corresponding to the first radio bearer from the MCG to the first cell group, and/or modifies the uplink data splitting threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the second threshold to the third threshold .
  • the third threshold is less than the second threshold
  • the first cell group is the cell group corresponding to the main channel when the dual connection is most recently deactivated or suspended.
  • the terminal device resumes communication with the first secondary cell, and keeps monitoring the RLM of the radio link of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell.
  • the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of SCG, or the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of the second network device.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device suspends communication with the first network device through the second radio bearer, and the second radio bearer is connected to the first network device between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • a radio bearer is associated, and the second radio bearer is a radio bearer between the terminal device and the first network device.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the first secondary cell on the second link.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device on the second link through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a method for dual connection management. This method is applicable to the first network device.
  • the first network device receives the first message sent by the terminal device. Wherein, the first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection;
  • the first network device sends a second message in response to the first message to the terminal device, where the second message is used for the terminal device to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first set of secondary cells, or, or suspend the connection with the first set of secondary cells, so
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the second message includes first link indication information
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device The first link between which will be suspended to communicate through the first radio bearer.
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link to be suspended from communication between the terminal device and the first secondary cell.
  • the first link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the first network device receives the second auxiliary information.
  • the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: the reason for deactivation or suspension, the duration of deactivation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is a communication service that triggers deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity. , The business duration of the trigger service.
  • the first network device sends third auxiliary information to the terminal device, and the third auxiliary information is used for the terminal device to perform the wireless connection in the dual connection mode.
  • Bearer configuration wherein the third auxiliary information is configured by the first network device or the second network device according to the bearer type, the preferably configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, and the configuration of different bearer types Any one of the priority levels is determined.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer. Level, the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the first network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device and the second network device, where the fifth message is for the terminal device
  • the second network device determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer, where the first radio bearer is a radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, and the second radio bearer Is a bearer between the terminal device and the first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a target communication service that is suspended between the terminal device and the second network device, and the target communication service is A communication service performed by the terminal device and the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the first network device receives a third message sent by the terminal device, where the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device The second link for communication via the first radio bearer to be activated or restored, or the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the first secondary cell are to be activated or restored The second link of communication.
  • the second link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the first network device sends a sixth message to the second network device, where the sixth message is used for the deactivation of the second network device or Suspend dual connection.
  • the first network device sends a seventh message to the second network device, where the seventh message is used for activation or recovery of the second network device Double connection.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is a secondary base station, and the second network device is a primary base station.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a dual-connection management method, which is applicable to a second network device.
  • the second network device receives the sixth message or the seventh message sent by the first network device.
  • the second network device deactivates or suspends the dual connection according to the sixth message.
  • the second network device activates or restores dual connectivity according to the seventh message.
  • the second network device also performs the deactivation or activation of the dual connection mode, which can avoid the situation that the second network device continues to send data or signaling to the terminal device when the terminal device has already deactivated the dual connection.
  • the waste of communication resources, or the problem of communication suspension caused by the unsynchronized activation of the second network device and the terminal device can be avoided, and the utilization rate of the communication resources can be improved.
  • the second network device deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the terminal device. Or, the second network device disconnects the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the second network device determines a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the second network device determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer between the second network device and the first wireless network, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit the terminal device and the second network device through the first wireless network. Communication services carried out by radio bearers.
  • the first network device is a primary base station
  • the second network device is a secondary base station
  • the first network device is a secondary base station
  • the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the network equipment is the main base station.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a dual-connection management method, which is suitable for terminal devices.
  • the terminal device determines the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the terminal device determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer with a first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped target communication service with the second network device, and the target communication The service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the associated second radio bearer is configured in advance for the first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device. Therefore, the communication service suspended or stopped on the first radio bearer due to the deactivation of dual connectivity can continue to be executed on the second radio bearer, thereby avoiding the impact of the communication service terminal caused by the deactivation of the dual connectivity on the terminal equipment, and ensuring The business continuity of dual connectivity improves the practicability and applicability of dual connectivity technology.
  • the terminal device receives the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the terminal device determines the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the first network device, where the first message is used to instruct or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device deactivates or suspends the dual connection.
  • the terminal device receives the second message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the terminal device deactivates or suspends the dual connection according to the second message.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct to deactivate the first secondary cell set, or to suspend communication with the first secondary cell set. Connection of cell collections.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the terminal device maintains the radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the second network device connection.
  • the terminal device maintains the RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnects the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the terminal device suspends or stops passing through the target communication service between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the terminal device transmits the suspended or stopped target communication service through the second radio bearer.
  • the terminal device suspends the target communication service on the first link with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device transmits the suspended or stopped target communication service on the first link through the second radio bearer.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a master base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension of the secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension. Start the second network device.
  • the terminal device sends a third message to the first network device, where the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device activates or restores dual connections.
  • the terminal device receives a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device, and activates or restores dual connectivity according to the fourth message .
  • the terminal device activates or restores the RRC connection with the second network device; or, restores the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the terminal device resumes transmission of the communication service between the terminal device and the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of SCG, or the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of the second network device.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device activates or resumes communication with the second network device on the second link through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • a dual-connection management method is provided, which is applicable to a first network device.
  • the first network device determines the fifth message.
  • the first network device sends the fifth message to the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the fifth message is used by the terminal device and the second network device to determine the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer, and the first radio bearer is the terminal device and the second network device.
  • a radio bearer between devices, the second radio bearer is a radio bearer with the terminal device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a pause or stop between the terminal device and the second network device
  • the target communication service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the first network device receives a first message sent by the terminal device, where the first message is used to instruct or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the first network device sends a second message in response to the first message to the terminal device, where the second message is used for the terminal device to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the first network device receives a third message sent by the terminal device, where the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the first network device sends a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first secondary cell, or to suspend communication with the first secondary cell. Collection of connections.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the second message includes first link indication information
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate the communication between the terminal device and the second network device The first link will be suspended when communicating through the first radio bearer.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate the communication between the terminal device and the second network device The second link to be resumed communication.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a dual-connection management method, which is applicable to a second network device.
  • the second network device receives the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the second network device determines a second radio bearer according to the fifth message, where the second radio bearer is used to transmit a target communication service suspended between the second network device and the terminal device, and the target communication service It is a communication service performed between the terminal device and the second network device through a first radio bearer.
  • a sixth message from the first network device is received.
  • the second network device deactivates or suspends the dual connection according to the sixth message, or activates or resumes the dual connection mode according to the seventh message.
  • the sixth message includes: indication information, the indication information being used to indicate to deactivate the first secondary cell set, or to suspend communication with the first set of secondary cells; Connections between sets of secondary cells.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the second network device deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the terminal device; or disconnects the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the second network device suspends communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • the second network device communicates with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the second network device obtains the seventh message sent by the first network device.
  • the second network device activates or restores dual connectivity according to the seventh message.
  • the second network device activates or restores the RRC connection with the terminal device; or, restores the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the second network device suspends communication with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the second network device activates or resumes communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the first aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a first message to the first network device, where the first message is used to instruct or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the processing unit is used to deactivate or suspend the dual connection.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the second message.
  • the second message comes from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the above-mentioned second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first set of secondary cells. Or the above indication information is used to indicate to suspend the connection with the first secondary cell set.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell
  • the processing unit maintains the radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the second network device connection.
  • the processing unit maintains the RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnects the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit suspends or stops communication through the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit sets the primary channel corresponding to the first radio bearer as the primary cell group MCG, and/or the processing unit modifies the uplink data separation threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the first threshold to the second threshold .
  • the second threshold is greater than the first threshold.
  • the processing unit suspends communication with the first secondary cell, and keeps monitoring RLM of the radio link of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell, where the first secondary cell is connected to the second secondary cell. The secondary cell where network equipment communicates.
  • the processing unit saves the data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit saves the configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit determines a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer with a first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped target communication service with the second network device, and the target communication The service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiver unit receives a fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the processing unit suspends or stops communication between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit transmits communication with the first radio bearer through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit suspends or stops communication with the first secondary cell on the first link.
  • the processing unit suspends communication with the second network device on the first link through the first radio bearer.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to send first auxiliary information to the first network device or the second network device, and the first auxiliary information includes at least one of the following : The bearer type requested to be configured, the preferred bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, the configuration priority of different bearer types, and the duration of the dual connection interruption.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer ,
  • the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the processing unit is configured to receive third auxiliary information sent by the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to perform radio bearer configuration in the dual connectivity mode according to the third auxiliary information, where the third auxiliary information is used by the first network device or the second network device according to the multiple Any one of priority information, the one or more radio bearer type information, and the identification information of the one or more radio bearers is determined.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send second auxiliary information to the first network device, and the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: deactivation or suspension
  • the reason for the deactivation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is the communication service that triggers the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection, and the service duration of the trigger service.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station. or.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a main base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension of the secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension. Start the second network device.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a third message to the first network device.
  • the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit receives a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit activates or restores the dual connection according to the fourth message.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the second network device; or, to restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to resume communication through the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to restore the main channel corresponding to the first radio bearer from the MCG to the first cell group, and/or modify the uplink data splitting threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the second threshold Into the third threshold.
  • the third threshold is less than the second threshold
  • the first cell group is the cell group corresponding to the main channel when the dual connection is most recently deactivated or suspended.
  • the processing unit is configured to resume communication with the first secondary cell, and maintain the RLM for radio link monitoring of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell.
  • the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of SCG, or the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to suspend communication with the first network device through the second radio bearer, and the second radio bearer is connected to the terminal device and the second network device. Is associated with the first radio bearer of, and the second radio bearer is the radio bearer between the terminal device and the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication with the first secondary cell on the second link.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication on the second link with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the first network device in the second aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive the first message sent by the terminal device. Wherein, the first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used by the processing unit to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the second message includes first link indication information
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device The first link between which will be suspended to communicate through the first radio bearer.
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link to be suspended from communication between the terminal device and the first secondary cell.
  • the first link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive second auxiliary information.
  • the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: the reason for deactivation or suspension, the duration of deactivation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is a communication service that triggers deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity. , The business duration of the trigger service.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to send third auxiliary information to the terminal device, and the third auxiliary information is used for the terminal device to perform the dual connection Mode of the radio bearer configuration, wherein the third auxiliary information is configured by the processing unit according to the request of the bearer type, the preferably configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, and the configuration priority of different bearer types. Any one is determined.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer. Level, the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to send a fifth message to the terminal device and the second network device, where the fifth message is for the terminal device
  • the second network device determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer, where the first radio bearer is a radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, and the second radio bearer Is a bearer between the terminal device and the first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a target communication service that is suspended between the terminal device and the second network device, and the target communication service is A communication service performed by the terminal device and the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to receive a third message sent by the terminal device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device The second link for communication via the first radio bearer to be activated or restored, or the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the first secondary cell are to be activated or restored The second link of communication.
  • the second link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to send a sixth message to the second network device, where the sixth message is used to deactivate the second network device or Suspend dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit is further configured to send a seventh message to the second network device, where the seventh message is used for the activation of the second network device or Restore dual connectivity.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is a secondary base station, and the second network device is a primary base station.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the second network device in the third aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive the sixth message or the seventh message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend dual connection according to the sixth message.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore dual connectivity according to the seventh message.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend the RRC connection with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit is configured to disconnect the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer between the second network device and the first wireless network, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit the terminal device and the second network device through the first wireless network. Communication services carried out by radio bearers.
  • the first network device is a primary base station
  • the second network device is a secondary base station
  • the first network device is a secondary base station
  • the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the network equipment is the main base station.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the fourth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to send a first message to the first network device, and the first message is used to instruct or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the processing unit is used to deactivate or suspend the dual connection.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a second message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the second message.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct to deactivate the first secondary cell set, or to suspend communication with the first secondary cell set. Connection of cell collections.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the processing unit is configured to maintain a radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and to deactivate or suspend communication with the second network device RRC connection between.
  • the processing unit is configured to maintain an RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnect the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to suspend or stop passing through the target communication service between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to transmit the suspended or stopped target communication service through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to suspend a target communication service on the first link between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to transmit the suspended or stopped target communication service on the first link through the second radio bearer.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a master base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension of a secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity is deactivation or suspension. Start the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to send a third message to the first network device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the processing unit is used to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore the dual connection according to the fourth message.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the second network device; or, restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to restore the communication service between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of SCG, or the activation or restoration of dual connectivity is activation or restoration of the second network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication on the second link with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the first network device in the fifth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the processing unit is used to determine the fifth message.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send the fifth message to the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the fifth message is used by the terminal device and the second network device to determine the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer, and the first radio bearer is the terminal device and the second network device.
  • a radio bearer between devices, the second radio bearer is a radio bearer with the terminal device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a pause or stop between the terminal device and the second network device
  • the target communication service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to receive a first message sent by the terminal device, and the first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection. Up.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send a second message in response to the first message to the terminal device, where the second message is used for the terminal device to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to receive a third message sent by the terminal device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first secondary cell, or to suspend communication with the first secondary cell. Connection of cell collections.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the second message includes first link indication information
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate the relationship between the terminal device and the second network device When communicating via the first radio bearer, the first link will be suspended.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate the relationship between the terminal device and the second network device The second link between which communication will be restored.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the second network device in the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine a second radio bearer according to the fifth message, where the second radio bearer is used to transmit a target communication service that is suspended between the second network device and the terminal device, and the target The communication service is a communication service performed between the terminal device and the second network device through a first radio bearer.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a sixth message from the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the sixth message, or activate or resume the dual connection mode according to the seventh message.
  • the sixth message includes: indication information used to instruct to deactivate the first secondary cell set, or to suspend and the first secondary cell set A connection between a set of auxiliary cells.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the processing unit is configured to deactivate or suspend the RRC connection with the terminal device; or, to disconnect the wireless connection with the terminal device. link.
  • the processing unit is configured to suspend communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit is configured to communicate with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to obtain the seventh message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore dual connectivity according to the seventh message.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the terminal device; or, restore the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit is configured to suspend communication with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit is configured to activate or resume communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device itself, or a component or module such as a chip inside the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a transceiver.
  • the processor is configured to call the code stored in the memory to execute the dual connection management method provided in any feasible implementation manner of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the first network device itself, or may be a component or module such as a chip inside the first network device.
  • the communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a transceiver.
  • the processor is configured to call the code stored in the memory to execute the dual connection management method provided in any feasible implementation manner of the second aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the second network device itself, or may be an element or module such as a chip inside the second network device.
  • the communication device includes a memory, a processor, and a transceiver.
  • the processor is configured to call the code stored in the memory to execute the dual connection management method provided in any feasible implementation manner of the third aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device itself, or may be a component or module such as a chip inside the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit is used to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor.
  • the processor is configured to run the above code instructions to implement the dual connection management method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the third aspect, and can also implement the dual connection management provided by the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the first network device itself, or may be an element or module such as a chip inside the first network device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit is used to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor.
  • the processor is configured to run the foregoing code instructions to implement the dual connection management method provided by any one of the foregoing second aspect or the fifth aspect, and can also implement the dual connection management provided by the foregoing second aspect or fifth aspect.
  • inventions of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be the first network device itself, or may be a component or module such as a chip inside the first network device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the interface circuit is used to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor.
  • the processor is configured to run the above code instructions to implement the dual connection management method provided by any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect or the sixth aspect, and can also implement the dual connection management provided by the third aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • any of the first or fourth aspects described above is implemented.
  • the dual-connection management method provided by a feasible implementation manner can also achieve the beneficial effects (or advantages) of the dual-connection management method provided by the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • any of the second or fifth aspects described above is implemented.
  • the dual-connection management method provided by a feasible implementation manner can also achieve the beneficial effects (or advantages) of the dual-connection management method provided in the second aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the instructions run on a computer, the third aspect or the sixth aspect described above is implemented.
  • the dual connection management method provided by any feasible implementation manner can also achieve the beneficial effects (or advantages) of the dual connection management method provided by the third aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions, when the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer executes the dual connection management method provided in the first or fourth aspect above,
  • the beneficial effects of the dual connection management method provided by the first aspect or the fourth aspect can also be achieved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions that, when the computer program product runs on a computer, cause the computer to execute the dual connection management method provided in the second or fifth aspect above,
  • the beneficial effects of the dual connection management method provided by the second aspect or the fifth aspect can also be achieved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product containing instructions that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the dual connection management method provided in the third aspect or the sixth aspect,
  • the beneficial effects of the dual connection management method provided by the third aspect or the sixth aspect can also be achieved.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication system including the communication devices described in the seventh, eighth, and ninth aspects above, or the tenth and eleventh aspects above And the communication device described in the twelfth aspect, or the communication device described in the thirteenth, fourteenth and fifteenth aspects above, or the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth aspects described above The communication device described in the aspect.
  • the efficiency of activation and deactivation of the dual connection can be improved, the continuity of communication services under the dual connection is ensured, and the applicability and practicability of the dual connection technology are improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flow chart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another flow chart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another flow chart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another flow chart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of another flow chart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another flow of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another flow of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the dual-connection management method provided by the embodiments of this application is suitable for long term evolution (LTE) systems or 5G systems that support the establishment of dual connections with 5G systems (also known as new radio NR systems), as well as other applications.
  • Various wireless access technologies and wireless communication systems capable of establishing dual connections with 5G systems such as code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), frequency division multiple access (frequency division multiple access, FDMA), time division multiple access (time division multiple access, TDMA), orthogonal frequency division multiple access (orthogonal frequency division multiple access, OFDMA), single carrier frequency division multiple access (single carrier-frequency division multiple access, SC-FDMA), multiple input and multiple output ( Multiple input multiple output, MIMO) and other access technology systems, as well as future communication systems, are not limited here.
  • code division multiple access code division multiple access
  • frequency division multiple access frequency division multiple access
  • time division multiple access time division multiple access
  • OFDMA orthogonal frequency division multiple access
  • SC-FDMA single carrier frequency division multiple access
  • MIMO Multiple
  • the network device involved in the embodiment of the present application is a device deployed in a radio access network (RAN) to provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices.
  • the above-mentioned network equipment can be various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, access point base station controllers, transceiver nodes (transmission reception point, TRP), etc., and can also be established by one or more base stations to establish communication with them. There are no restrictions on the control equipment composed of connected controllers. For the convenience of description, in the subsequent description of the embodiments of the present application, network devices will be collectively described.
  • the terminal equipment (user equipment, UE) involved in this application is a wireless device that supports a dual connection mode and can provide voice and/or data connectivity to the user.
  • the above-mentioned wireless device may be a handheld device that supports dual connections and has a wireless connection function, or another processing device connected to a wireless modem, and a mobile terminal that communicates with one or more core networks via a wireless access network.
  • the above-mentioned wireless terminal may be a mobile phone, computer, tablet computer, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), mobile Internet device (mobile Internet device, MID), wearable device, and e-book reader (e-book reader). )Wait.
  • the above-mentioned wireless device may also be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, built-in computer or vehicle-mounted mobile device.
  • the above-mentioned wireless device may also be a mobile station (mobile station) or an access point (access point).
  • the first network equipment (also referred to as the primary network equipment) and the second network equipment (also referred to as the secondary network equipment) involved in the embodiments of the present application can be either an LTE system, a 5G system, or Network equipment under other wireless communication systems.
  • the terminal equipment involved in the embodiments of the present application may also be a terminal equipment under an LTE system, a 5G system, or other wireless communication systems, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the embodiment of the present application will take the first network device, the second network device, and the terminal device as an example under the 5G system.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the application.
  • a terminal device that supports dual connections can establish a communication connection with two network devices at the same time.
  • the above two network devices include a primary network device (such as a master base station (gNB, MgNB)) and a secondary network device (such as a secondary base station (gNB, SgNB)).
  • the main network device and the auxiliary network device may be connected through an irrational backhaul line (backhaul).
  • backhaul irrational backhaul line
  • terminal devices supporting dual connectivity are configured with at least two cell groups, one is the master cell group (MCG) and the other is the secondary cell group (SCG) .
  • the primary cell group refers to the cell group associated with the above-mentioned primary network device.
  • the above-mentioned primary cell group includes one primary cell (primary cell, PCell) and zero or more secondary cells (secondary cell, SCell).
  • the foregoing primary cell is a cell that establishes an RRC connection with a terminal device, and the primary cell is configured with physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resources.
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the aforementioned secondary cell is configured with PUCCH resources.
  • the above-mentioned secondary cell group refers to the cell group associated with the secondary network device.
  • the secondary cell group includes one primary secondary cell (primary secondary cell, PSCell) and zero or more secondary cells.
  • the primary and secondary cell is the only secondary cell configured with PUCCH resources in the secondary cell group.
  • the radio bearer is a collection of wireless logical resources in the wireless communication system, which can provide users with data connection capabilities from terminal devices to the terrestrial wireless access network (or core network).
  • radio bearers can be divided into signaling radio bearer (SRB) and data radio bearer (DRB).
  • SRB signaling radio bearer
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the above-mentioned signaling radio bearer is mainly used for transmission
  • the above-mentioned data radio bearer is mainly used for data transmission.
  • the radio bearers involved in the embodiments of this application mainly refer to data radio bearers. In practical applications, combining the architecture of the user plane under dual connectivity, the above-mentioned data radio bearer can be further divided.
  • a data radio bearer serviced only by the main network device may be referred to as an MCG bearer.
  • the data radio bearer provided only by the auxiliary network device is called the SCG bearer.
  • the data radio bearer that is served by the main network device and the auxiliary network device at the same time is called a split bearer.
  • Radio resource control (RRC) state terminal equipment has three RRC states: RRC connected state (connected state), RRC idle state (idle state) and inactive state (inactive state).
  • RRC connected state connected state
  • RRC idle state idle state
  • inactive state inactive state
  • RRC connected state (or, can also be referred to as connected state for short.
  • connected state and “RRC connected state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the network, and it can Perform data transfer.
  • RRC idle state (or, can also be referred to as idle state for short.
  • idle state and “RRC idle state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, and the base station The context of the terminal device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process.
  • RRC inactive state (or, can also be referred to as inactive state for short.
  • inactive state “inactive state”, “deactivated state”, “inactive state”, “RRC inactive state” and “RRC deactivated state” , Is the same concept, these terms can be interchanged): the terminal device entered the RRC connection state before, and then the base station released the RRC connection, but the base station saved the context of the terminal device. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state again from the RRC inactive state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection recovery process (or called the RRC connection reestablishment process). Compared with the RRC establishment process, the RRC recovery process has shorter time delay and lower signaling overhead. However, the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
  • the so-called dual-card device is a terminal device that supports the dual-card dual-standby function.
  • a dual-card mobile phone can insert two SIM (subscriber identity module, subscriber identity module) cards, and can be on standby at the same time.
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • One of the two SIM cards is called the primary card, and the other is called the secondary card.
  • a user uses a GSM dual-card dual-standby mobile phone, he can use the mobile phone numbers of two GSM networks on one mobile phone.
  • a CDMA dual-card dual-standby mobile phone is used, he can use the mobile phone numbers of two CDMA networks at the same time.
  • dual-card terminal devices can be divided into the following two types:
  • this type of terminal device can simultaneously receive or send information through multiple mobile networks provided by different operators, and it can also monitor paging messages in two networks at the same time.
  • a dual-card terminal device is usually implemented by multiple receiving modules and a single transmitting module shared between two SIMs.
  • deactivating dual connectivity, deactivating a secondary cell group, or deactivating a secondary network device are equivalent terms, and its feature is mainly that the terminal device is currently connected to the SN or the secondary cell group.
  • the data transmission between the terminals is suspended, but the RRC connection or radio link that has been established between the terminal equipment and the SN or the secondary cell group is not released.
  • the transmission of the uplink service can be suspended, or only the transmission of the downlink service, or both up and down. Bank operations are suspended.
  • deactivation and suspension are equivalent descriptions, and activation and restoration are equivalent descriptions. For simplicity of expression, deactivation or activation is uniformly used in the subsequent descriptions.
  • the terminal device communicates with the first network device and the second network device through dual connections.
  • the first network device can issue a radio resource control reconfiguration message to the terminal device to release the RRC connection between the terminal device and the second network device, or Wireless link.
  • the dual connectivity needs to be activated, the first network device will deliver a new RRC reconfiguration message to the terminal device again to re-establish the RRC connection or wireless link between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the terminal device Due to the large delay in the release or re-establishment of the communication connection between the terminal device and the auxiliary network device, the terminal device will not be able to quickly deactivate or activate the dual connection, which also causes the deactivation of the dual connection to cause problems. Suspended services cannot be quickly resumed and executed.
  • the technical problem to be solved by the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is: how to improve the efficiency of activation and deactivation of the dual connection and how to ensure the continuous execution of the service under the dual connection.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a dual-connection management method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • This dual-connection management method is suitable for the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 1 above. It can be seen from Figure 2 that the method includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the first network device.
  • the terminal device in the scenario where the terminal device communicates with the first network device and the second network device based on dual connectivity, when the terminal device determines that the dual connectivity needs to be deactivated (also known as suspending) Dual connection, in the following text, deactivation and suspension have the same meaning and can be used interchangeably), it can determine the first message and send the first message to the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device is a dual-card device.
  • the terminal device can determine whether it needs to deactivate the dual connection according to the business conditions of the main card and the secondary card. For example, when the terminal device detects that its secondary card has When initiating a service request, such as an information management system (IMS) registration or a service request corresponding to a short message service (short message service, SMS) service, the terminal device can determine that the dual connection needs to be deactivated. For another example, when the terminal device determines that the time required for the service performed by the secondary card is greater than the preset time, it may also determine that the dual connection needs to be deactivated or suspended. In another possible implementation, the terminal device is a single-card device.
  • IMS information management system
  • SMS short message service
  • the terminal device determines that the dual connection does not need to be used according to its current business volume and network load and other information, it can also be determined that the dual connection needs to be deactivated. It should be noted that the terminal device can determine whether to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the actual use situation. The above determination scenario is only an example, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the above-mentioned first message is mainly used to remind or remind the first network device that it needs to deactivate the dual connection. That is, the terminal device only informs the first network device that it has started or is about to start the deactivation of the dual connection through the above-mentioned first message, and does not require the first network device to further confirm whether it can perform the deactivation of the dual connection. That is, after the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first message to the first network device, it can directly deactivate the dual connection, and does not need to wait for the network device to feed back a confirmation message before deactivating the dual connection. This simplifies the process of deactivating the dual connection of the terminal device and improves the efficiency of deactivating the dual connection.
  • the above-mentioned first message is mainly used for the terminal device to request the first network device to confirm whether it can perform dual connection deactivation.
  • the first network device can determine whether the terminal device can deactivate the dual connection according to information such as the service status and network status of the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further includes step S1101. The first network device determines that the terminal device can perform dual connection deactivation, and then sends a second message to the terminal device to notify the terminal device that it can perform dual connection deactivation.
  • the first network device determines that the terminal device cannot perform dual connection deactivation, it may not feed back any information to the terminal device, or send a negative message to the terminal device to notify the terminal device that it cannot perform dual connection deactivation.
  • the terminal device may also send the above-mentioned first message to the second network device directly or indirectly through the first network device.
  • the second network device can use the same method as the first network device to determine and inform the terminal device whether it can deactivate the dual connection. In the following, description will be made by taking the first network device receiving the first message and feeding back the second message as an example.
  • the terminal device may send the above-mentioned first message through a terminal capability update message or a terminal capability temporary change message.
  • the terminal device may also carry the foregoing first message through various media access control elements (MAC CE).
  • MAC CE media access control elements
  • the terminal device may newly generate a specific media access control element to send the above-mentioned first message, and the terminal device may also use existing media access control elements such as a buffer status report (BSR) to transfer the above-mentioned first message.
  • BSR buffer status report
  • a message is sent to the above-mentioned first network device or the second network device.
  • the terminal device may set a certain reserved bit in the BSR to 0, and then use the BSR as the first message requesting or instructing to deactivate the dual connectivity.
  • the above-mentioned first message may also be carried in other messages or signaling, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • step S110 is an optional step, and step S1101 does not rely on step S110.
  • the terminal device can also directly receive the above-mentioned first network device or the second network device. Two news. That is, the first network device and the second network device may directly send the above-mentioned second message instead of sending the above-mentioned second message after receiving the above-mentioned first message.
  • the first terminal device may also send an auxiliary information to the above-mentioned first network device (for ease of understanding and distinction, hereinafter referred to as the first auxiliary information Instead of description).
  • the foregoing first auxiliary information may include one or more of the bearer type requested to be configured by the terminal device, the preferably configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, the configuration priority of different bearer types, and the duration of the dual connection interruption.
  • the above-mentioned bearer type may specifically include MCG bearer, SCG bearer or split bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first auxiliary information including the type of bearer requested for configuration refers to the above-mentioned first auxiliary information including the type of radio bearer for which the terminal device requests the first network device to configure.
  • the foregoing first auxiliary information includes a split bearer, that is, the terminal device requests the first network device to configure the radio bearer used by it as a split bearer.
  • the inclusion of the preferred configured bearer type in the first auxiliary information means that the one or more types of radio bearers included in the first auxiliary information are the types of radio bearers that the terminal device prefers or tends to use.
  • the foregoing first auxiliary information includes split bearer and MCG bearer, which indicates that the terminal device preferably or tends to use split bearer or MCG bearer.
  • the inclusion of configuration priorities of different bearers in the first auxiliary information means that the first auxiliary information may include multiple configuration priorities corresponding to multiple radio bearers of the same or different types.
  • the first auxiliary information includes the first configuration priority corresponding to the first MCG bearer, the second configuration priority corresponding to the second MCG bearer, the third configuration priority corresponding to the first SCG bearer, and the second SCG bearer corresponding The fourth configuration priority. Among them, the fourth configuration has the highest priority, and the first configuration has the lowest priority.
  • the first auxiliary information sent by the terminal device includes these contents, which means that the terminal device requests the first network device to preferentially configure the second SCG bearer for it as a radio bearer. If the second SCG bearer cannot be configured for it, the first SCG bearer can be configured for it, and so on.
  • the configuration priority of different bearer types included in the first auxiliary information means that the first auxiliary information includes one or more types of radio bearers required or inclined to be used by the terminal device, and the types of different radio bearers correspond to There are different configuration priorities.
  • the aforementioned first auxiliary information may include three types of radio bearers: SCG bearer, MCG bearer, and Split bearer.
  • the MCG bearer corresponds to the first configuration priority
  • the SCG bearer corresponds to the second configuration priority
  • the split bearer corresponds to the third configuration priority.
  • Configure priority Among them, the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the terminal device sends the first auxiliary information containing these contents, it is to request the first network device to preferentially configure the split bearer for it.
  • the SCG bearer can be configured first.
  • the MCG bearer can be configured for it.
  • the duration of the dual connection interruption included in the first auxiliary information may be used to assist the first network device in determining a radio bearer applicable to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can report the bearer type (such as MCG bearer, SCG bearer, Split bearer, etc.) that it requests network configuration to the network through the above-mentioned first auxiliary information, or report its preferred or preferred bearer type to the network. Or, the priority of the configuration tendency of multiple radio bearers is indicated.
  • the terminal device may report a preferred radio bearer as a separate bearer. Or the configuration priority of reporting the separated bearer is higher than the bearer of the secondary cell group.
  • the terminal device can also report the estimated interruption duration that will occur when the data transmission of the dual connection is performed, and report the estimated interruption duration to the network.
  • the terminal device can determine the interruption time of the dual connection according to the service type of the secondary card, and report the duration of the interruption time to the network. For example, if the service that causes the dual connection to be deactivated is the SMS service, the terminal device can report the interruption time for 1s-3s.
  • the first network device may configure the bearer type requested, the preferred configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, and the configuration of different bearer types included in the first auxiliary information.
  • the priority and the duration of the dual connection interruption determine the radio bearer suitable for the terminal device, and send the bearer configuration information corresponding to the radio bearer to the terminal device to configure the preferred or preferred radio bearer for the terminal device. For example, assume that the bearer type requested by the terminal device to configure in the first auxiliary information sent by the terminal device is a split bearer.
  • the first network device After receiving the first auxiliary information, the first network device determines that the terminal device can be configured for split bearers, then the first network device may determine the bearer configuration information corresponding to a first split bearer, and send the bearer configuration information to Terminal Equipment.
  • the terminal device can determine an available first split bearer according to the bearer configuration information, and perform data or signaling transmission through the first split bearer.
  • the terminal device can request the first network device to configure a more suitable radio bearer for it through the above-mentioned first auxiliary information, which can avoid the problem of the ability of the terminal device being reduced due to the unreasonable radio bearer configured by the first network device.
  • the terminal device may also send the second auxiliary information to the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned second auxiliary information may specifically include at least one of the following: reason information for deactivation or suspension, duration information of activation or suspension, service type information of the service, and service duration information of triggering the service.
  • the aforementioned trigger service is a communication service that triggers the terminal device to deactivate or suspend the dual connection. For example, the IMS registration or SMS service on the secondary card mentioned above.
  • the first network device may determine whether the terminal device can deactivate the dual connection at the current moment in combination with the first auxiliary information. Sending the first auxiliary information to the first network device can enable the first network device to more accurately determine whether the terminal device needs to perform dual connection deactivation.
  • the first network device may send the foregoing second message through a carrier such as a media access control element (MAC CE) or a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) signaling.
  • a carrier such as a media access control element (MAC CE) or a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) signaling.
  • the foregoing second message may be a deactivated MAC CE containing multiple indication bits.
  • Each indicator bit contained in this deactivated MAC CE corresponds to each secondary cell in the secondary cell group of the terminal device one-to-one.
  • An indicator bit is used to indicate whether a secondary cell needs to be deactivated. For example, suppose that the indication bit B1 corresponds to the secondary cell cell1. When the value of the indicator bit B1 is 1, it can indicate that the secondary cell cell1 needs to be deactivated.
  • Table 1-1 is a medium access control element for deactivation or activation of a secondary cell provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the table contains 31 indication bits corresponding to the 1-31th secondary cell, including c1 to c31, which are respectively used to indicate the status of the corresponding secondary cell.
  • the bit when the bit is set to 1, it means that the corresponding secondary cell is activated, and when the bit is set to 0, it means that the corresponding secondary cell is deactivated.
  • a certain indicator bit if a certain indicator bit is set to 1, it means that the secondary cell corresponding to the indicator bit should be deactivated. If an indicator bit is set to 0, it means that the secondary cell corresponding to the indicator bit maintains the current state. In the subsequent activation process, if a certain indicator bit is set to 1, it means that the secondary cell corresponding to the indicator bit should be activated. If an indicator bit is set to 0, it means that the secondary cell corresponding to the indicator bit should maintain the current state.
  • the above is only an application mode of MAC CE. Through the communication method provided in the embodiment of this application, the first network device can indicate the status of each secondary cell through MAC CE, and the meaning of bits can also be There are other setting methods, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the foregoing second message may further include an indication information.
  • the indication information may be used to instruct the terminal device to deactivate the first secondary cell set or suspend the connection with the first secondary cell set.
  • the above-mentioned first cell set may include a primary and secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary and secondary cells (for easy distinction, the first secondary cell will be used instead of description below).
  • the indicator bit R can be defined as corresponding to the primary and secondary cells The indicator bit.
  • the terminal device When the indicator bit R corresponding to the primary and secondary cell and the indicator bit corresponding to one or more secondary cells other than the primary and secondary cell are 1, the terminal device is instructed to deactivate dual connectivity. When these indicator bits are 0, the current state of these secondary cells is maintained unchanged.
  • the first secondary cell set includes primary and secondary cells
  • the second message uses MAC CE as the carrier, if the index bit R value corresponding to the primary and secondary cells in the MAC CE shown in Table 1-1 is 1, it indicates The terminal device deactivates the dual connectivity, that is, deactivates all the secondary cells in the secondary cell group.
  • the design of the activation or deactivation indication of the primary and secondary cells can use a method similar to the indicator bit R in Table 1-1 above, or use a dedicated MAC CE that is activated or deactivated by the secondary cell, and is the MAC The CE allocates a special logical channel label.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that the primary secondary cell and one or more first secondary cells in the secondary cell group need to be deactivated or suspended according to the above second message, it can determine that the first network device allows it to perform dual Deactivation of the connection. Or, when the terminal device determines that the primary and secondary cells in the secondary cell group need to be deactivated according to the above second message, it can determine that the first network device allows it to perform dual connectivity deactivation. In other words, the activation or deactivation mechanism of the secondary cell is extended here. When the terminal device receives an indication that both the secondary cell and the primary and secondary cells are deactivated or activated, it confirms that the dual connectivity is deactivated or the dual connectivity is activated. Or, when the terminal device receives the activation or deactivation instruction of the primary and secondary cell, it confirms the activation or deactivation of dual connectivity.
  • the terminal device deactivates or suspends the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may deactivate or suspend the dual connection after sending the above-mentioned first message or receiving the second message sent by the first network device. Specifically, after the terminal device deactivates the dual connection, the radio resource control RRC connection between it and the first network device will continue to be maintained, and the RRC connection between it and the second network device will be deactivated. Activate or suspend. Or, after the terminal device deactivates the dual connection, the RRC connection between it and the first network device will continue to be maintained, and the wireless link between it and the second network device will be disconnected.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication with the second network device through some or all of the secondary cells in the secondary cell group.
  • the terminal device may first determine the N1 secondary cells included in the corresponding secondary cell group according to its corresponding system configuration information. Then, the terminal device can determine N2 first secondary cells from the above N1 secondary cells.
  • N2 is less than or equal to N1
  • the above-mentioned first secondary cell is a secondary cell capable of communicating with the second network device. That is to say, the terminal device can communicate with the second network device through the above-mentioned first secondary cell.
  • the terminal device may suspend the communication between the above-mentioned N2 first secondary cells and the second network device.
  • the terminal device can deactivate or suspend the RRC connection established between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device. Alternatively, the terminal device may disconnect the radio link established between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device.
  • the terminal equipment may continue to maintain radio link monitoring (RLM) of the primary and secondary cells in the above-mentioned secondary cell group.
  • RLM radio link monitoring
  • the terminal device When the terminal device suspends communication with the first secondary cell, it still saves the communication resources occupied by the RRC connection or wireless link established between the first secondary cell and the second network device, so that the terminal device can be There is no need to re-divide communication resources during the activation process of the dual connection, thereby improving the deactivation and activation efficiency of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer types include SCG bearers and split bearers.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is an SCG bearer.
  • the terminal device may suspend or stop the communication between the terminal device and the second network device based on the SCG bearer.
  • the communication described here includes signaling interaction and/or data transmission. It should be noted that the terminal device here only suspends or stops the communication based on the SCG bearer, and does not release the RRC connection or the communication resource corresponding to the wireless link between the terminal device and the second network device, and does not delete the above SCG bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is a split bearer.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication between the terminal device and the second network device through the split bearer. Specifically, the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication with the second network device through the bearer on the SCG side in the split bearer, and the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication with the second network device through the bearer on the MCG side in the split bearer. The communication achieved was not affected. Further, while suspending or stopping the communication on the split bearer, the terminal device can also set the primary path of the split bearer from the cell group being used as the primary cell group MCG.
  • the terminal device may also set the uplink data split threshold (ul-data split threshold) corresponding to the split bearer from the first threshold currently in use to the second threshold.
  • the above-mentioned second threshold is much larger than the above-mentioned first threshold.
  • the above-mentioned second threshold may be infinite.
  • setting the uplink data separation threshold to infinity can fully ensure that the main channel of the split bearer after the dual connection is deactivated is the MCG, which ensures the continuity of services transmitted through the split bearer.
  • the terminal device may determine whether the main channel corresponding to the split bearer is the MCG or the SCG according to the above-mentioned uplink data separation threshold.
  • the uplink separation parameter determined by the terminal device according to the current network status and other information is equal to or greater than the above uplink data separation threshold, it can be determined that the main channels carried by the split are SCG and MCG.
  • the terminal device determines that the uplink separation parameter is less than the above-mentioned uplink data separation threshold it can determine that the main channel carried by the split is the MCG.
  • the terminal device sets the uplink data separation threshold corresponding to the split bearer to a second threshold that is much larger than the first threshold, which can fully ensure that the main channel of the split bearer determined by the terminal device is MCG, which can reduce the SCG side of the split bearer. The impact of communication suspension caused by the bearer being deactivated.
  • the terminal device may also save the data transmission status information corresponding to the SCG bearer or the split bearer.
  • the aforementioned data transmission status information mainly includes information about data packets that have been successfully transmitted and information about data packets that have not been successfully transmitted.
  • the terminal device may also save the configuration information corresponding to the SCG bearer or the split bearer.
  • the above configuration information includes the information of the main channel carried by the split. There is no specific limitation on the separation threshold from the preset uplink data, etc.
  • the terminal device only suspends the communication through the SCG bearer or the split bearer, but the SCG bearer or the split bearer is not deleted. Therefore, the terminal device can continue to use the aforementioned SCG bearer or split bearer during the subsequent activation of dual connectivity. There is no need to reconfigure a new radio bearer, thereby improving the deactivation and activation efficiency of dual connectivity, and also improving the practicability and applicability of dual connectivity technology.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop uplink communication or downlink communication between some or all of the secondary cells in the secondary cell group and the second network device.
  • the foregoing second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link to be suspended communication between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the above-mentioned first link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • Combining the above-mentioned first link indication information and the content of the above-mentioned deactivation method one it can be known that after determining that the terminal device needs to deactivate dual connectivity, it can determine the above-mentioned first link indication message from the above-mentioned second message, and according to the above-mentioned first link indication message.
  • a link indication message determines whether it is the uplink or the downlink that is suspended or stopped.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop performing the uplink between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device.
  • Uplink communication If the terminal device determines that it is the downlink that is suspended or stopped according to the first link indication message, the terminal device can suspend or stop performing the downlink between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device.
  • Downlink communication For the specific process, refer to the process of suspending communication with the N2 first secondary cells described in the above-mentioned deactivation method 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first network device may include in the above second message the indication information to deactivate only the downlink data of the terminal device, or only the indication information to deactivate the uplink data of the terminal device, or to deactivate the uplink and downlink data of the terminal device. Instructions.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the uplink communication or downlink communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer types include SCG bearers and split bearers.
  • the above-mentioned second message may include first link indication information, and the first link indication information may be used to indicate the first link between the terminal device and the second network device that will be suspended.
  • the above-mentioned first link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device determines that the dual connection needs to be deactivated, it can extract the first link indication information from the above second message, and determine according to the above first link indication information that the link to be suspended for communication is the uplink The link is also the downlink. In the following, it is assumed that the above-mentioned first link indication information indicates the uplink.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines that the link to be suspended is the uplink, in the scenario where the first radio bearer is the SCG bearer, the terminal device can suspend the uplink of the second network device on the uplink through the SCG bearer. Communication. In a scenario where the first radio bearer is a split bearer, the terminal device may suspend uplink communication with the second network device on the uplink through the split bearer. For the specific process, refer to the process of suspending the communication on the SCG bearer or the split bearer described in the above-mentioned deactivation method three, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device only suspends the communication on the uplink or the downlink, which can ensure that the transmission of some key information between the terminal device and the second network device will not be suspended. Thereby reducing the impact of the deactivation of the dual connection on the service execution capability of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication service transmitted with the second network device through the first radio bearer, and transfer the communication service to the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer to continue to transmit the communication service.
  • the second radio bearer associated with the above-mentioned first radio bearer may be determined.
  • the above-mentioned second radio bearer is a radio bearer between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the foregoing second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped first communication service, and this first communication service refers to a communication service performed by a terminal device and a second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is radio bearer A.
  • the terminal device Before the terminal device performs dual connectivity deactivation, it can select an MCG bearer from the MCG bearers that have been established between the terminal device and the first network device (preferably, the MCG bearer is not used), and set the MCG The bearer is determined to be the second radio bearer associated with the above-mentioned first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device may also receive the fifth message from the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned fifth message is used to indicate the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the terminal device may create a new MCG bearer according to the radio bearer configuration information contained in the fifth message, and determine the newly created MCG bearer as the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the established MCG bearer or the newly created MCG bearer can be a separate MCG bearer, or it can be the MCG bearer in the secondary node terminating the separated bearer (ie the MCG side bearer in SN terminated Split Beare) , There are no specific restrictions here.
  • the above-mentioned second radio bearer is used to replace the deactivated first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, so as to ensure the continuity of the communication service between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the first network device or the second network device can determine the radio bearer associated with the primary cell group for the radio bearer associated with the secondary cell group.
  • the above-mentioned radio bearers associated with the secondary cell group mainly include the secondary cell group bearer, the secondary cell split bearer (SCG split bearer), the primary cell split bearer (MCG split bearer), and the packet data aggregation layer protocol based on the secondary cell group.
  • Convergence Protocol (PDCP) wireless bearer ie bearer with SCG PDCP).
  • the first network device or the second network device may configure an associated MCG bearer for the terminal device.
  • the MCG bearer may be an existing MCG bearer of the terminal device or a newly created terminal device.
  • the backup MCG bearer Then, in the case of deactivating the dual connectivity, the terminal device can switch the data originally mapped on the SCG bearer for transmission to the MCG bearer or the MCG side link of the MCG bearer to perform transmission. In the case of subsequent activation of dual connectivity, the terminal device can continue to transmit the data stream originally mapped to the SCG bearer on the original SCG bearer, instead of transmitting on the above-mentioned associated MCG bearer or MCG separate bearer.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device deactivates the dual connection, the terminal device can map the data to the above-mentioned backup MCG bearer for transmission, or the terminal device can only perform the execution on the MCG link carried by the SCG separated bearer Data transmission without using the link on the SCG side for data transmission.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop communication with the second network device based on the SCG bearer Service (for the convenience of distinction, the second communication service is used instead of description in the afternoon), and the data transmission status information corresponding to the SCG bearer is saved (for the convenience of distinction, the first data transmission status information will be substituted for the description below). Then, the terminal device may continue to execute the second communication service according to the first data transmission state information through the second radio bearer.
  • the terminal device can suspend passing through
  • the split bearer carries the communication service with the second network device (for the convenience of distinction, the third communication service will be substituted for the description below), and saves the data transmission status information corresponding to the split bearer (for the convenience of distinction, the second data will be used below) Transmission status information instead of description). Then, the terminal device may continue to execute the third communication service according to the second data transmission state information through the second radio bearer.
  • the terminal device may also save the configuration information corresponding to the aforementioned SCG bearer or split bearer.
  • This configuration information can be used for subsequent activation of dual connections.
  • the foregoing configuration information may specifically include the main channel information carried by the split and a preset uplink data separation threshold, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
  • the suspended communication service between the terminal device and the second network device can be continued by the terminal device through the second radio bearer, which ensures the service continuity of the communication service and improves the applicability and applicability of the dual-connection technology. Practicality.
  • the terminal device can suspend or stop the uplink communication or downlink communication transmitted with the second network device through the first radio bearer, and transfer to the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer to continue to transmit the uplink communication. Communication or downlink communication.
  • the second message further includes first link indication information for indicating the first link.
  • the first link includes uplink or downlink.
  • the terminal device may determine whether the suspended or stopped link is the uplink or the downlink according to the first link indication message. If the terminal device determines that it is the uplink that is suspended or stopped according to the first link indication message, the terminal device may suspend or stop the uplink communication between the SCG bearer and the second network device.
  • the terminal device can save the data transmission status information corresponding to the SCG bearer (for the convenience of distinction, the third data transmission status information will be substituted for the description below). Then, the terminal device may continue to perform the uplink communication originally performed on the first radio bearer on the second radio bearer according to the third data transmission state. If the terminal device determines that it is the downlink that is suspended or stopped according to the first link indication message, the terminal device may suspend or stop the downlink communication between the SCG bearer and the second network device. At the same time, the terminal device can save the data transmission status information corresponding to the SCG bearer (for the convenience of distinction, the fourth data transmission status information will be substituted for the description below). Then, the terminal device may continue to perform the downlink communication originally performed on the first radio bearer on the second radio bearer according to the foregoing fourth data transmission state.
  • the process of deactivating dual connectivity for a terminal device in a scenario where the first radio bearer is a split bearer is similar to the process of deactivating dual connectivity performed in a scenario where the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer. Go into details.
  • the terminal device is performing dual connectivity During the deactivation process, since the terminal device does not use the air interface radio resources of the SCG, the terminal device can continue to use the current radio bearer. Alternatively, the terminal device may also switch the communication service originally executed on the radio bearer to the second radio bearer for execution.
  • the terminal device determines to perform at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device determines that the main channel is the main cell group, and sets the uplink data separation threshold to be infinite.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the dual-connection deactivation instruction information sent by the first network device, if the dual-connection deactivation instruction information contains the instruction information to only deactivate the dual-connection transmission of the downlink data, the terminal device deactivates according to the instruction Dual connection mode reception of downlink data. Or, if the deactivation instruction information includes instruction information for deactivating only the dual-connection transmission of uplink data of the terminal device, the terminal device deactivates the dual-connection transmission mode of the uplink data according to the instruction information. Or, if the deactivation instruction information includes the dual-connection deactivation instruction information of uplink and downlink data, the terminal device deactivates the dual-connection transmission of the terminal device's uplink and downlink data according to the instruction.
  • the terminal device only suspends or stops the communication with the second network device when the dual connection is deactivated, and does not release the RRC connection or wireless link established with the second network device , which can ensure that the dual connection can be activated more quickly in the subsequent, which improves the efficiency of activation and deactivation of the dual connection, and improves the applicability and practicability of the dual connection technology.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another process of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from Figure 3 that the method also includes the following steps:
  • the first network device sends a sixth message to the second network device.
  • the first network device may send a sixth message to the second network device.
  • the sixth message is used to instruct the second terminal device to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the first network device may send the above-mentioned sixth message to the second network device through a MAC control element or other carrier.
  • the above sixth message may be an activated MAC CE containing multiple indication bits.
  • Each indicator bit included in this activated MAC CE corresponds to each secondary cell in the secondary cell group of the terminal device one-to-one.
  • An indicator bit is used to indicate whether a secondary cell needs to be deactivated. For example, suppose that the indication bit B1 corresponds to the secondary cell cell1. When the value of the indicator bit B1 is 1, it can indicate that the secondary cell cell1 needs to be deactivated.
  • the second network device may send a deactivation confirmation message to the first network device in response to the sixth message.
  • S140 The second network device deactivates the dual connection.
  • the second network device may deactivate or suspend the dual connection.
  • the operation of deactivating or suspending dual connection is mainly for the operation of the radio bearer or communication link between the terminal device and the second network device, it is for the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the deactivation process of the two is the same.
  • the second network device can also perform the deactivation dual connection operation performed by the terminal device. For example, assuming that the terminal device uses the deactivation method described above to deactivate dual connectivity, the second network device can also determine N2 first secondary cells and suspend the passage between the above N2 first secondary cells and the terminal device. Communication.
  • the process of deactivating the dual connection for the second network device can be referred to the deactivation method described in Deactivation Method One, Deactivation Method Two, Deactivation Method Three, Deactivation Method Four, Deactivation Method Five, and Deactivation Method Six in the previous section. The process of dual connection will not be repeated here.
  • the sixth message received by the foregoing second network device may further include first link indication information. That is, during the deactivation process, the second network device may also determine whether the uplink communication or the downlink communication is suspended according to the above-mentioned first link indication information.
  • the terminal device and the second network device are both deactivated in the dual connection mode, which can avoid the problem of the second network device continuing to send data or signaling to the terminal device when the terminal device has already deactivated the dual connection mode.
  • the waste of communication resources can improve the utilization rate of communication resources.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of another flow of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from Figure 4 that the method also includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device sends a third message to the first network device.
  • the terminal device when it determines that it needs to be activated or restored (in this application, activation and restoration can be used interchangeably, and activation will be described below in a unified manner), it can send the first network device to the first network device.
  • activation and restoration can be used interchangeably, and activation will be described below in a unified manner
  • the terminal device can send the first network device to the first network device.
  • Three news Here, the above-mentioned third message is used to indicate or request the activation of the dual connection to the second network device.
  • the terminal device in actual applications, in a scenario where the terminal device is a dual-card device, if the terminal device determines that the service initiated by its secondary card, such as IMS registration or SMS service, has been executed, it can determine that dual-connection activation is required. Or, when the terminal device determines that the duration corresponding to the service executed on the secondary card is equal to or greater than the preset duration upper limit, it can also determine that the dual connection needs to be activated. Or, in a scenario where the terminal device is a single-card device, when the terminal device determines that it needs to use dual connectivity according to its current business volume and network load and other information, it can also be determined to activate the dual connectivity. It can be understood that the prerequisites for the terminal device to determine that dual connection activation is required are not limited to the above three, and other prerequisites may also exist, and this application does not make specific restrictions.
  • the third message is mainly used to remind or prompt that the first network device terminal device needs to activate the dual connection. That is, the terminal device only informs the first network device that it has started or is about to start dual-connection activation through the above-mentioned third message, and does not require the first network device to further confirm whether it can perform dual-connection activation. This simplifies the process of deactivating the dual connection of the terminal device and improves the efficiency of deactivating the dual connection.
  • the third message is mainly used for the terminal device to request the first network device to confirm whether it can activate the dual connection.
  • the first network device can determine whether the terminal device can activate the dual connection according to information such as the service status and network status of the terminal device.
  • the first network device may also determine whether the terminal device can activate the dual connection according to the time length information for triggering the service included in the second auxiliary information and the like. If the first network device determines that the terminal device can perform dual connection deactivation, it may send a fourth message to the terminal device to instruct the terminal device to perform dual connection activation.
  • the first network device determines that the terminal device cannot activate the dual connection, it can send a negative message to the terminal device to indicate that the terminal device cannot activate the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may also send the above-mentioned third message to the second network device directly or indirectly through the first network device.
  • the second network device can use the same method as the first network device to determine and inform the terminal device whether it can activate the dual connection. In the following, the specific scenario of the first network device receiving the third message and feeding back the fourth message will be described.
  • the fourth message may be sent through a carrier such as a medium access control element (MAC CE) or PDCCH signaling.
  • MAC CE medium access control element
  • the foregoing fourth message may be a deactivated MAC CE containing multiple indication bits.
  • Each indicator bit contained in this deactivated MAC CE corresponds to each secondary cell in the secondary cell group of the terminal device one-to-one.
  • An indicator bit is used to indicate whether a secondary cell needs to be deactivated. For example, suppose that the indication bit B2 corresponds to the secondary cell cell2. When the value of the indicator bit B2 is 1, it can indicate that the secondary cell cell2 needs to be activated.
  • the terminal device can also directly receive the fourth message from the first network device or the second network device. That is, the first network device and the second network device may directly send the fourth message, instead of sending the fourth message after receiving the third message.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may activate or restore the dual connection after sending the foregoing third message or receiving the fourth message sent by the first network device. Specifically, the terminal device can continue to maintain the RRC connection between it and the first network device, and restore the RRC connection between it and the second network device. Alternatively, the terminal device may continue to maintain the RRC connection between it and the first network device, and restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the terminal device can resume the communication between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device after determining that the dual connectivity needs to be activated. Specifically, the terminal device activates or restores the RRC connection established between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device. Alternatively, the terminal device may restore the radio link established between the N2 first secondary cells and the second network device.
  • the terminal device does not need to reconfigure the communication resources corresponding to the wireless connection between it and the second network device during the activation process of the dual connection, which can simplify the activation process of the dual connection and improve the activation efficiency of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may determine N4 second secondary cells from the secondary cell group.
  • the above-mentioned second secondary cell is a secondary cell in a deactivated state. In other words, it is a secondary cell that is not used between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the foregoing N4 second secondary cells are different from the foregoing N2 first secondary cells.
  • the above-mentioned secondary cell group includes five secondary cells, Scell1, Scell2, Scell3, Scell4, and Scell5. Among them, the terminal device communicates with the second network device through Scell3, Scell4, and Scell5 (ie, Scell3).
  • Scell4 and Scell5 are in an activated state, Scell3, Scell4, and Scell5 belong to the first secondary cell), Scell1 and Scell2 are not used (that is, Scell1 and Scell2 are in a deactivated state).
  • the terminal device can suspend communication with the second network device through Scell3, Scell4, and Scell5.
  • the terminal device can select Scell1, Scell2, Scell3 from the above-mentioned Scell1, Scell2, Scell3, Scell4, and Scell5 as the second secondary cell and activate it.
  • the one or more secondary cells where the terminal device resumes communication in the process of activating dual connectivity may be different from the one or more secondary cells where the terminal device suspends communication during the deactivation process.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is an SCG bearer.
  • the terminal device determines that it needs to activate the dual connection, it can directly resume the communication between the terminal device and the second network device based on the SCG bearer.
  • the terminal device since the terminal device only suspends or stops the communication based on the SCG bearer when the dual connection is deactivated, the communication resources corresponding to the RRC connection or the wireless link between the terminal device and the second network device are not released.
  • the above-mentioned SCG bearer is also not deleted, so during the activation process, the terminal device does not need to create a new radio bearer, which improves the activation efficiency of dual connectivity.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is a split bearer.
  • the terminal device determines that the dual connection needs to be activated, the communication between the terminal device and the second network device based on the split bearer can be resumed. Specifically, the terminal device can resume communication with the second network device based on the SCG side bearer in the split bearer. Further, while restoring communication on the split bearer, the terminal device may also restore the primary path (primary path) carried by the split from the above-mentioned primary cell group MCG to the first cell group. Alternatively, the terminal device may also set the uplink data split threshold (ul-data split threshold) corresponding to the split bearer from the foregoing second threshold.
  • the above-mentioned second threshold is modified to a third threshold.
  • the third threshold value is smaller than the second threshold value, and the third threshold value may be equal to the first threshold value, or may not be equal to the first threshold value.
  • the terminal device can perform according to the foregoing The data transmission status information or configuration information restores the communication with the second network device based on the SCG bearer or the split bearer.
  • the terminal device Since the terminal device only suspends communication via SCG bearer or split bearer during the deactivation process, but the SCG bearer or split bearer is not deleted, the terminal device can continue to use the aforementioned SCG bearer when dual connectivity is activated. Or split bearer without reconfiguring a new radio bearer, thereby improving the deactivation and activation efficiency of dual connectivity.
  • the above-mentioned fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate whether the second link to be resumed communication between the terminal device and the second network device is an uplink or Downlink.
  • the above-mentioned second link and the above-mentioned first link may be the same or different.
  • the initial situation is that the terminal device performs downlink communication with the second network device through SCell1 and SCell2, and the uplink communication is suspended at this time.
  • the terminal device can suspend the downlink communication between it and the second network device through SCell1 and SCell2, and during the activation process, the terminal device can communicate between it and the second network device through SCell1 and SCell2.
  • the ongoing uplink communication resumes, but the downlink communication is still suspended or stopped.
  • the terminal device can activate or resume the uplink communication or downlink communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device can extract the second link indication information from the above fourth message, and determine that it will be used according to the above second link indication information. Whether the link to resume communication is the uplink or the downlink. In the following, it is assumed that the above-mentioned second link indication information indicates the uplink.
  • the terminal device determines that the link to be restored is the uplink, in the scenario where the first radio bearer is the SCG bearer, the terminal device can resume the uplink performed on the uplink with the second network device through the SCG bearer. Communication.
  • the terminal device can resume uplink communication with the second network device on the uplink through the split bearer.
  • the second link here may be the same as the above-mentioned first link or different from the above-mentioned first link.
  • the terminal device may determine the above-mentioned second radio bearer according to the fifth message before performing the deactivation of the dual connection. Then, in the process of deactivating the dual connectivity, the communication service suspended on the first radio bearer will be replaced by the above-mentioned second radio bearer. Therefore, when the terminal device determines to activate the dual connection, the terminal device can suspend or stop the communication service with the second network device based on the second radio bearer, and save the data transmission status information corresponding to the second radio bearer. Then, the terminal device can continue to execute the above-mentioned communication service on the first radio bearer according to the data transmission state information corresponding to the second radio bearer.
  • the terminal device suspends or stops the communication service on the first link carried by the first radio, and transfers the communication service on the first link to the first link. 2. Execute on the radio bearer.
  • the terminal device may restore the communication service transmitted by the second radio bearer on the first link to the first radio bearer for execution.
  • the specific process please refer to the process of activating the dual connection described in the activation method five, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device after receiving the dual connection activation instruction, the terminal device can perform at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device may activate only the dual-connection transmission in the downlink direction according to the instruction, or only activate the dual-connection transmission in the uplink direction or activate the dual-connection transmission in the uplink and downlink directions.
  • S170 The first network device sends a seventh message to the second network device.
  • the first network device may also send a seventh message to the second network device to instruct the second network device to activate or restore the dual connection.
  • the specific process of sending the seventh message by the first network device to the second network device participates in the process of sending the fourth message by the first network device to the terminal device described above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the seventh message may be a deactivated MAC CE containing multiple indication bits.
  • the MAC CE reference may be made to the content described in step S110.
  • S180 The second network device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the second network device may activate or restore the dual connection.
  • the operation of activating or restoring dual connectivity is mainly for the operation of the radio bearer or communication link between the terminal device and the second network device, therefore, for the terminal device and the second network device, , The activation process of the two is the same.
  • the second network device can also perform the activation of the dual connection operation performed by the terminal device. Therefore, the process of activating dual connectivity by the second network device can refer to the activation method 1, activation method 2, activation method 3, activation method 4, activation method 5, and activation method 6 described in the previous activation method (here, The implementation object of the method is changed from the terminal device to the second network device), which will not be repeated here.
  • the above-mentioned first network device refers to the primary network device (or primary base station), and the above-mentioned second network device refers to the secondary network device (or secondary base station).
  • the above-mentioned first network device may also be a secondary base station, and the above-mentioned second network device may also be a primary base station, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the terminal device sends the above-mentioned first message, third message and other information, it can also be directly or indirectly sent to the second network device and receive the feedback information sent by the second network device. This application does not make specific restrictions. .
  • the terminal device can actively request or indicate to the first network device that it needs to deactivate or activate the dual connection, and the RRC connection established with the second network device will not be released during the deactivation process or
  • the wireless link can ensure that it can activate the dual connection more quickly, and can improve the efficiency of the activation or deactivation of the dual connection, thereby improving the applicability and practicability of the dual connection technology.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • This dual-connection management method is suitable for the wireless communication system shown in FIG. 1 above. It can be seen from Figure 5 that the method includes the following steps:
  • the terminal device can determine the first radio bearer between it and the second network device according to its system information.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer includes an SCG bearer or a split bearer, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • S220 Determine a second radio bearer associated with the foregoing first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device may continue to determine the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the above-mentioned second radio bearer is a radio bearer in the terminal device and the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped first communication service, and this first communication service refers to a communication service performed by a terminal device and a second network device through the above-mentioned first radio bearer.
  • the above-mentioned first radio bearer is radio bearer A.
  • the terminal device Before the terminal device performs dual connectivity deactivation, it can select an MCG bearer from the MCG bearers that have been established between the terminal device and the first network device (preferably, the MCG bearer is not used), and set the MCG The bearer is determined to be the second radio bearer associated with the above-mentioned first radio bearer.
  • the terminal device may also receive the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the foregoing fifth message is used to indicate the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, and the foregoing fifth message may include radio bearer configuration information.
  • the terminal device may create a new MCG bearer according to the radio bearer configuration information contained in the fifth message, and determine the newly created MCG bearer as the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the established MCG bearer or the newly created MCG bearer can be a separate MCG bearer, or it can be the MCG bearer in the secondary node terminating the separated bearer (ie the MCG side bearer in SN terminated Split Beare) , There are no specific restrictions here.
  • the above-mentioned second radio bearer is used to replace the deactivated first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, so as to ensure the continuity of the communication service between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • FIG. 6 is another flowchart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from Figure 6 that the method further includes:
  • S230 The terminal device sends a first message to the first network device.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that the dual connectivity needs to be deactivated, it can determine the first message and send the first message to the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the process of sending the first message to the first network device by the terminal device refer to the process of sending the first message to the first network device described in step S110 in the first embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device deactivates or suspends the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may deactivate or suspend the dual connection after sending the above-mentioned first message or receiving the second message sent by the first network device. Specifically, after the terminal device deactivates the dual connection, the radio resource control RRC connection between it and the first network device will continue to be maintained, and the RRC connection between it and the second network device will be deactivated. Activate or suspend. Or, after the terminal device deactivates the dual connection, the RRC connection between it and the first network device will continue to be maintained, and the wireless link between it and the second network device will be disconnected.
  • the process of deactivating or suspending dual connectivity of the terminal device can refer to the deactivation method 5 described in step S120 in the first embodiment or the deactivation method.
  • the process of deactivating the dual link involved in the sixth activation method will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from Fig. 7 that the method further includes:
  • the first network device sends a sixth message to the second network device.
  • the first network device may send a sixth message to the second network device.
  • the sixth message is used to instruct the second terminal device to deactivate or suspend dual connection.
  • the process for the first network device to send the sixth message to the second network device can refer to the process for the first network device to send the sixth message to the second network device described in step S130 in the first embodiment. Go into details again.
  • S260 The second network device deactivates or suspends the dual connection.
  • the second network device may deactivate or suspend the dual connection.
  • the operation of deactivating or suspending dual connection is mainly for the operation of the radio bearer or communication link between the terminal device and the second network device, it is for the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the deactivation process of the two is the same.
  • the process of deactivating dual connectivity by the second network device can be specifically referred to in the deactivation method 5 or the deactivation method 6 described in step S120 in the first embodiment. The process of deactivating the dual link will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 8 is another flowchart of a dual connection management method provided by an embodiment of the present application. It can be seen from Fig. 8 that the method further includes:
  • S270 The terminal device sends a third message to the first network device.
  • the third message may be sent to the first network device.
  • the third message is used to indicate or request the activation of the dual connection to the second network device.
  • the process of sending the third message to the first network device by the terminal device can refer to the process of sending the third message to the first network device described in step S150 in the first embodiment, which will not be repeated this time.
  • S280 The terminal device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the terminal device may activate or restore the dual connection after sending the third message or receiving the fourth message sent by the first network device. Specifically, the terminal device can continue to maintain the RRC connection between it and the first network device, and restore the RRC connection between it and the second network device. Alternatively, the terminal device may continue to maintain the RRC connection between it and the first network device, and restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the process of activating or resuming dual connectivity of the terminal device can be described in the activation method 5 and activation method 6 in step S160 in the first embodiment. The process of activating or restoring dual connections will not be repeated here.
  • S290 The first network device sends a seventh message to the second network device.
  • the first network device may also send a seventh message to the second network device to instruct the second network device to activate or restore the dual connection.
  • the process of sending the seventh message by the first network device to the second network device can refer to the process of sending the seventh message by the first network device to the terminal device described in step S170 in the first embodiment, which will not be omitted here. Go into details.
  • the second network device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the second network device may activate or restore the dual connection.
  • the operation of activating or restoring dual connectivity is mainly for the operation of the radio bearer or communication link between the terminal device and the second network device, therefore, for the terminal device and the second network device, , The activation process of the two is the same. Therefore, in specific implementation, for the process of activating or restoring dual connectivity by the second network device, please refer to the activation or restoring process of dual connectivity described in the activation method 5 and activation method 6 in step S160 in the first embodiment. No longer.
  • the associated second radio bearer is configured in advance for the first radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device. Therefore, the communication service suspended or stopped on the first radio bearer due to the deactivation of dual connectivity can continue to be executed on the second radio bearer, thereby avoiding the impact of the communication service terminal caused by the deactivation of the dual connectivity on the terminal equipment, and ensuring The business continuity of dual connectivity improves the practicability and applicability of dual connectivity technology.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device can be used to perform the functions of the terminal device in the first embodiment above.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device itself, or an internal component or module of the terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by a user using the device and output data to the user. It should be noted that in some scenarios, the communication device may not include an input and output device.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 9 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 9. In an actual device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and/or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire device. Execute the software program and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor in FIG. 9 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit can also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as a bus.
  • the device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and the various components of the device may be connected through various buses.
  • the aforementioned baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the above-mentioned central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit of the device, and the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the device.
  • the communication device includes a transceiving unit 91 and a processing unit 92.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 91 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 91 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 91 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiver unit 91 and the processing unit 92 are jointly used to execute multiple processes or steps performed by the terminal device in the foregoing Embodiment 1.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the second message.
  • the second message comes from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the foregoing second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first set of secondary cells. Or the above indication information is used to indicate to suspend the connection with the first secondary cell set.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the processing unit 92 maintains the radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and deactivates or suspends the RRC connection with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 maintains the RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnects the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 suspends or stops communication through the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 sets the primary channel corresponding to the first radio bearer as the primary cell group MCG, and/or the processing unit 92 modifies the uplink data separation threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the first threshold to the first Two thresholds.
  • the second threshold is greater than the first threshold.
  • the processing unit 92 suspends communication with the first secondary cell, and maintains RLM monitoring of the radio link of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell, where the first secondary cell is connected to the first secondary cell. 2. The secondary cell where the network equipment communicates.
  • the processing unit 92 saves the data transmission status information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 saves the configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 determines a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer with a first network device, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended or stopped target communication service with the second network device, and the target communication The service is a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit 91 receives the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit 92 determines the second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the processing unit 92 suspends or stops communication between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit 91 transmits communication with the first radio bearer through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 suspends or stops communication with the first secondary cell on the first link.
  • the processing unit 92 suspends communication with the second network device on the first link through the first radio bearer.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to send first auxiliary information to the first network device or the second network device, and the first auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: Bearer type, preferably configured bearer type, configuration priority of different bearers, configuration priority of different bearer types, dual connection interruption duration.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer.
  • the configuration priority is the highest.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to receive third auxiliary information sent by the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to perform the radio bearer configuration in the dual connectivity mode according to the third auxiliary information, where the third auxiliary information is used by the first network device or the second network device according to the Any one of multiple priority information, the one or more radio bearer type information, and the identification information of the one or more radio bearers is determined.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to send second auxiliary information to the first network device, and the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: deactivation or suspension reason, deactivation The duration of activation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is the communication service that triggers deactivation or suspension of the dual connection, and the service duration of the trigger service.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station. or.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a main base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection is deactivation or suspension of the secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection is the deactivation or suspension of the second network device .
  • the transceiver unit 91 is configured to send a third message to the first network device.
  • the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the terminal device activates or restores the dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit 91 receives a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 activates or restores the dual connection according to the fourth message.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the second network device; or, to restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to restore communication through the first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to restore the main channel corresponding to the first radio bearer from the MCG to the first cell group, and/or change the uplink data splitting threshold corresponding to the first radio bearer from the second threshold value Modified to the third threshold.
  • the third threshold is less than the second threshold
  • the first cell group is the cell group corresponding to the main channel when the dual connection is most recently deactivated or suspended.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to resume communication with the first secondary cell, and maintain the RLM for radio link monitoring of the primary and secondary cells in the first secondary cell.
  • said activating or restoring dual connectivity is activating or restoring SCG, or said activating or restoring dual connectivity is activating or restoring the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to suspend communication with the first network device through the second radio bearer, and the second radio bearer is connected to the first radio between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the bearer is associated, and the second radio bearer is a radio bearer between the terminal device and the first network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or resume communication with the first secondary cell on the second link.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device on the second link through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the function of the first network device in the first embodiment.
  • the communication device may be the first network device itself, or may be an internal component or module of the first network device.
  • the communication device may include one or more transceiving units 101 and one or more processing units 102.
  • the foregoing transceiver unit 101 may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna and a radio frequency unit.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit 101 is mainly used for the transceiver of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the instruction information in the above-mentioned embodiments to the terminal equipment.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 102 is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the device, and so on.
  • the foregoing transceiver unit 101 and the processing unit 102 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed device.
  • the foregoing processing unit 102 may be used to control the device to execute the process of determining the indication information in the foregoing first embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 102 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network (such as an NR network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support different access standards. Wireless access network.
  • the aforementioned processing unit 102 further includes a memory and a processor, and the aforementioned memory is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the foregoing processor is used to control the device to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the device to execute the operation flow of the device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the aforementioned memory and processor may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • transceiver unit 101 and the processing unit 102 are jointly used to execute the steps or processes of the dual-connection management method executed by the first network device in the above-mentioned first embodiment.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device will be suspended.
  • the first link for communication through the first radio bearer.
  • the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link to be suspended from communication between the terminal device and the first secondary cell.
  • the first link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the transceiver unit 101 is configured to receive second auxiliary information.
  • the second auxiliary information includes at least one of the following: the reason for deactivation or suspension, the duration of deactivation or suspension, the service type of the trigger service, and the trigger service is a communication service that triggers deactivation or suspension of dual connectivity. , The business duration of the trigger service.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is further configured to send third auxiliary information to the terminal device, and the third auxiliary information is used for the terminal device to perform the radio bearer in the dual connection mode.
  • Configuration wherein the third auxiliary information is configured by the processing unit 102 according to any one of the bearer type of the request, the preferably configured bearer type, the configuration priority of different bearers, and the configuration priority of different bearer types determine.
  • the configuration priorities of the different bearers include the first configuration priority, the second configuration priority, and the third configuration priority corresponding to the SCG bearer, the MCG bearer, and the split bearer.
  • the third configuration has the highest priority.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is configured to send a fifth message to the terminal device and the second network device, where the fifth message is used for the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the network device determines a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer, where the first radio bearer is the radio bearer between the terminal device and the second network device, and the second radio bearer is the terminal A bearer between a device and a first network device, the second radio bearer is used to transmit a suspended target communication service between the terminal device and the second network device, and the target communication service is the terminal device And a communication service performed with the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is configured to receive a third message sent by a terminal device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is further configured to send a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information
  • the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the second network device The second link for communication via the first radio bearer to be activated or restored, or the second link indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device and the first secondary cell are to be activated or restored The second link of communication.
  • the second link includes an uplink or a downlink.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is configured to send a sixth message to the second network device, where the sixth message is used to deactivate or suspend dual connectivity by the second network device .
  • the transceiving unit 101 is further configured to send a seventh message to the second network device, where the seventh message is used for the second network device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is a secondary base station, and the second network device is a primary base station.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device can be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the function of the second network device in the first embodiment.
  • the communication device may be the second network device itself, or may be an internal component or module of the second network device.
  • the device may include one or more transceiving units 111 and one or more processing units 112.
  • the foregoing transceiver unit 111 may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna and a radio frequency unit.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit 111 is mainly used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals and convert the radio frequency signals to baseband signals, for example, to send the instruction information in the above-mentioned embodiments to the terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 112 is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the device, and so on.
  • the foregoing transceiver unit 111 and the processing unit 112 may be physically arranged together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed device.
  • the foregoing processing unit 112 may be used to control the device to execute the process of determining the indication information in the foregoing first embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 112 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a wireless access network (such as an NR network) with a single access indication, or may respectively support different access standards. Wireless access network.
  • the above-mentioned processing unit 112 further includes a memory and a processor, and the above-mentioned memory is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the foregoing processor is used to control the device to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the device to execute the operation flow of the device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the aforementioned memory and processor may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit 111 and the above-mentioned processing unit 112 may be used to execute the steps or processes of the dual-connection management method executed by the first network device in the above-mentioned first embodiment.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to deactivate or suspend the RRC connection with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to disconnect the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to determine a first radio bearer with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 112 is further configured to determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer.
  • the second radio bearer is a bearer between the second network device and the first wireless network, and the second radio bearer is used to transmit the terminal device and the second network device through the first wireless network. Communication services carried out by radio bearers.
  • the first network device is a primary base station and the second network device is a secondary base station, or the first network device is a secondary base station, and the second network device is a primary base station .
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit 91 and the processing unit 9 may also be used to execute the process or steps of the dual-connection management method executed by the terminal device in the above-mentioned second embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to receive the fifth message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to determine a second radio bearer associated with the first radio bearer according to the fifth message.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to send a first message to the first network device, and the first message is used to instruct or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the processing unit 92 is used to deactivate or suspend dual connections.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to receive a second message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the second message.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first set of secondary cells, or to suspend the connection with the first set of secondary cells.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to maintain a radio resource control RRC connection with the first network device, and deactivate or suspend the RRC connection with the second network device. connection.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to maintain the RRC connection with the first network device, and disconnect the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to suspend or stop the target communication service between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to transmit the suspended or stopped target communication service through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to suspend the target communication service on the first link between the first radio bearer and the second network device.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to transmit the suspended or stopped target communication service on the first link through the second radio bearer.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate the first link.
  • the first radio bearer is an SCG bearer or a split bearer.
  • the first network device is a primary base station, and the second network device is a secondary base station.
  • the first network device is an auxiliary base station, and the second network device is a master base station.
  • the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection is deactivation or suspension of the secondary cell group SCG, or the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection is the deactivation or suspension of the second network device .
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to send a third message to the first network device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection.
  • the processing unit 92 is used to activate or restore dual connections.
  • the transceiving unit 91 is configured to receive a fourth message from the first network device or the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore the dual connection according to the fourth message.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the second network device; or, to restore the wireless link with the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to restore the communication service between the transmission and the second network device through the first radio bearer.
  • said activating or restoring dual connectivity is activating or restoring SCG, or said activating or restoring dual connectivity is activating or restoring the second network device.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved data transmission state information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or restore communication with the second network device through the first radio bearer according to the saved configuration information of the first radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 92 is configured to activate or resume communication with the second network device on the second link through the first radio bearer.
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the second link.
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit 101 and the processing unit 102 may also be used to execute the process or steps of the dual-connection management method executed by the first network device in the above-mentioned second embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is configured to receive a first message sent by the terminal device, and the first message is used to indicate or request the deactivation or suspension of the dual connection.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is further configured to send a second message in response to the first message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to deactivate or suspend the dual connection of the terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 101 is configured to receive a third message sent by the terminal device, and the third message is used to instruct or request the activation or recovery of the dual connection .
  • the transceiving unit 101 is further configured to send a fourth message in response to the third message to the terminal device, where the fourth message is used for the terminal device to activate or restore dual connectivity.
  • the second message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct to deactivate the first secondary cell, or to suspend the connection with the first set of secondary cells.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the second message includes first link indication information, and the first link indication information is used to indicate that a first radio bearer is used between the terminal device and the second network device.
  • the first link will be suspended while communicating.
  • the fourth message includes second link indication information, and the second link indication information is used to indicate the communication between the terminal device and the second network device to be resumed.
  • the second link is used to indicate the communication between the terminal device and the second network device to be resumed.
  • the first link is an uplink or a downlink
  • the second link is an uplink or a downlink
  • the above-mentioned transceiving unit 111 and the processing unit 112 may also be used to execute the process or steps of the dual-connection management method executed by the second network device in the above-mentioned second embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 111 is configured to receive a sixth message from the first network device.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to deactivate or suspend the dual connection according to the sixth message, or activate or resume the dual connection mode according to the seventh message.
  • the sixth message includes indication information, the indication information is used to indicate to deactivate the first secondary cell set, or to suspend communication with the first secondary cell set Connection.
  • the first set of secondary cells includes a primary secondary cell and/or one or more secondary cells other than the primary secondary cell.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to deactivate or suspend the RRC connection with the terminal device; or, to disconnect the RRC connection with the terminal device. Wireless link.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to suspend communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit 111 is configured to communicate with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the transceiving unit 111 is configured to obtain the seventh message sent by the first network device.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to activate or restore dual connectivity according to the seventh message.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to activate or restore the RRC connection with the terminal device; or, to restore the wireless link with the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to suspend communication with the terminal device through the second radio bearer.
  • the processing unit 112 is configured to activate or resume communication with the terminal device through the first radio bearer.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device in the first embodiment, and may be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the terminal device in the first embodiment.
  • the communication device includes a processor 121, a memory 122, a transceiver 123, and a bus system 124.
  • the memory 121 includes but is not limited to RAM, ROM, EPROM or CD-ROM, and the memory 121 is used to store related instructions and data.
  • the memory 121 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or their subsets, or their extended sets:
  • Operating instructions including various operating instructions, used to implement various operations.
  • Operating system Including various system programs, used to implement various basic services and process hardware-based tasks.
  • the transceiver 123 may be a communication module or a transceiver circuit. In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver 123 is used to execute the process of sending or receiving the first message or the second message involved in the first embodiment.
  • the processor 121 may be a controller, a CPU, a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of Embodiment 1 of the present application. The process of deactivating or activating the dual connection as mentioned in the first embodiment.
  • the processor 121 may also be a combination that implements computing functions, for example, includes a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • bus system 124 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • bus system 124 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • various buses are marked as the bus system 124 in FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 12 is only schematically drawn.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • Programming logic devices discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the terminal device in the first embodiment is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the terminal device in the first embodiment above.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, and the communication device may be the terminal device in the first embodiment.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is used to execute the method or step executed by the terminal device in the first embodiment above.
  • the foregoing terminal device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the above-mentioned processor, and exist independently.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the first network device in the first embodiment, and may be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the first network device in the first embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor 131, a memory 132, a transceiver 133 and a bus system 134.
  • the memory 131 includes but is not limited to RAM, ROM, EPROM or CD-ROM, and the memory 131 is used to store related instructions and data.
  • the memory 131 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or their subsets, or their extended sets:
  • Operating instructions including various operating instructions, used to implement various operations.
  • Operating system Including various system programs, used to implement various basic services and process hardware-based tasks.
  • the transceiver 133 may be a communication module or a transceiver circuit. In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver 133 is used to execute the sending process of the second message or the fifth message involved in the first embodiment.
  • the processor 131 may be a controller, a CPU, a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA, or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of Embodiment 1 of the present application.
  • the processor 131 may also be a combination that implements computing functions, for example, it includes a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • bus system 134 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • bus system 134 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • various buses are marked as the bus system 134 in FIG. 13.
  • Figure 13 is only schematically drawn.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • Programming logic devices discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the first network device in the first embodiment is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the first network device in the first embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be the first network device in the first embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is configured to execute the method or step executed by the first network device in the first embodiment.
  • the foregoing first network device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the above-mentioned processor, and exist independently.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the second network device in the first embodiment, and may be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the second network device in the first embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor 141, a memory 142, a transceiver 143 and a bus system 144.
  • the memory 141 includes but is not limited to RAM, ROM, EPROM or CD-ROM, and the memory 141 is used to store related instructions and data.
  • the memory 141 stores the following elements, executable modules or data structures, or their subsets, or their extended sets:
  • Operating instructions including various operating instructions, used to implement various operations.
  • Operating system Including various system programs, used to implement various basic services and process hardware-based tasks.
  • FIG. 14 Only one memory is shown in FIG. 14. Of course, the memory can also be set to multiple as needed.
  • the transceiver 143 may be a communication module or a transceiver circuit. In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver 143 is used to execute the sending process of the indication information involved in the first embodiment.
  • the processor 141 may be a controller, a CPU, a general-purpose processor, a DSP, an ASIC, an FPGA or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 141 may also be a combination that implements computing functions, for example, a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • bus system 144 the various components of the device are coupled together through a bus system 144, where the bus system 144 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • bus system 144 may include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus in addition to a data bus.
  • various buses are marked as the bus system 144 in FIG. 14.
  • FIG. 14 is only schematically drawn.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • Programming logic devices discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the second network device in the first embodiment is implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the second network device in the first embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be the network device in the first embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is configured to execute the method or step executed by the second network device in the first embodiment above.
  • the foregoing network device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading the software code stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside of the foregoing processor, and exist independently.
  • the communication device may also be the terminal device in the second embodiment, which can be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the terminal device in the second embodiment.
  • the specific process please refer to the previous section, so I won’t repeat it here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the terminal device in the second embodiment above is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the terminal device in the second embodiment above.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, and the communication device may be the terminal device in the second embodiment.
  • the communication device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is used to execute the method or step executed by the terminal device in the second embodiment above.
  • the foregoing terminal device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the above-mentioned processor, and exist independently.
  • the communication device can also be the first network device in the second embodiment, and can be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the first network device in the second embodiment. Please refer to the previous text for specific content, so I won't repeat it here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the first network device in the second embodiment is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the first network device in the second embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be the first network device in the second embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is configured to execute the method or step executed by the first network device in the second embodiment above.
  • the foregoing first network device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the above-mentioned processor, and exist independently.
  • the communication device may also be the second network device in the second embodiment, which can be used to implement the dual-connection management method implemented by the second network device in the second embodiment. Please refer to the above for specific content, so I won't repeat it here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the method or step executed by the second network device in the second embodiment is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, implements the method or step executed by the second network device in the second embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be the network device in the second embodiment.
  • the device includes a processor and an interface.
  • the processor is configured to execute the method or step executed by the second network device in the second embodiment above.
  • the foregoing network device may be a chip, and the foregoing processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like.
  • the processor When implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading the software code stored in the memory, and the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside of the foregoing processor, and exist independently.
  • the above method embodiments it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the above-mentioned computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the foregoing computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the foregoing processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the above-mentioned computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the above-mentioned computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the medium can be any usable medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more usable media.
  • the above usable medium can be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), and an optical medium.
  • a high-density digital video disc (DVD) or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD), etc.).
  • system and “network” in the embodiments of the present application can often be used interchangeably.
  • the term “and/or” in this embodiment is only an association relationship that describes associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, and A and B exist at the same time. There are three cases of B alone.
  • the character "/" in this text generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device described above is only illustrative, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another. A system or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may also be electrical, mechanical or other forms of connection.
  • the functional units in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例公开了一种双连接管理方法。该方法中终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备以双连接通信。该方法包括：终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息，该第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。终端设备去激活或挂起双连接。采用本申请实施例，可提升双连接的激活和去激活的效率，保证了双连接下的通信业务的连续性，提升了双连接技术的适用性和实用性。

Description

一种双连接管理方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2019年09月27日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910931116.X、申请名称为“一种双连接管理方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信领域，尤其涉及一种双连接管理方法和通信装置。
背景技术
由于移动用户大流量业务的激增，同时为了增加用户吞吐量和增强移动性能，人们提出了一些新的高层协议的增强方案，双连接(dual connectivity，DC)技术就是其中之一。在双连接下，终端设备可以同时与主网络设备和辅网络设备建立通信连接，并通过主网络设备和辅网络设备实现与核心网之间的数据传输。
在实际应用中，会出现需要将双连接临时中断一段时间的情况。例如，当终端设备为双卡设备时，若其副卡需要进行某些业务，则需要将其主卡的双连接去激活(又可描述为双连接的挂起)，并等待副卡的业务执行完成后再重新激活主卡的双链接(又可描述为恢复双连接)。在现有技术中，主网络设备会通过无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)重配置消息控制终端设备与辅网络设备之间的通信连接的释放和建立来完成双连接的去激活或激活。由于终端设备与辅网络设备之间的通信连接的释放和重建立存在较大的时延，导致终端设备无法快速的进行双连接的去激活或者激活，也同样使得因双连接的去激活而被暂停的业务无法快速恢复和执行。因此，如何提升双连接的激活和去激活的效率以及如何保证双连接下的业务的连续执行，成为亟待解决的技术问题之一。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种双连接管理方法和通信装置。采用本申请实施例，可提升双连接的激活和去激活的效率，保证了双连接下的通信业务的连续性，提升了双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种双连接管理方法。该所述方法适用于终端设备，该述终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备以双连接通信。终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息。这里，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。终端设备去激活或挂起双连接。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可主动向第一网络设备请求或者指示其需要进行双连接的去激活(又称为挂起)或者激活(又称为恢复)，并且其去激活双连接时不会释放与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接或者无线链路，可保证其能够更加快速的进行双连接的激活，可提升双连接的激活或者去激活的效率，从而提升双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第二消息，并根据所述第二消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起。这里，向 第一网络设备发送第一消息以请求第一网络设备确认能否进行双连接的去激活，可避免终端设备因误判造成的不必要的双连接的去激活，可提升终端设备在双连接下的业务的连续性。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，上述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活第一辅小区集合。或者上述指示信息用于指示挂起与第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，终端设备保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备暂停或停止通过与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载的通信。这里，终端设备在暂停与第一辅小区通信的同时，仍然保存其通过上述第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接或者无线链路所占用的通信资源，这样可使得终端设备在后续进行双连接的激活过程中无需重新分通信资源，可提升双连接的去激活和激活效率。或者，终端设备将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道设置为主小区组MCG，和/或，终端设备将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分离阈值由第一阈值修改成为第二阈值。这里，所述第二阈值大于第一阈值。或者，终端设备暂停与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM，其中，所述第一辅小区为与所述第二网络设备进行通信的辅小区。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备保存所述第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息。或者，所述终端设备保存所述第一无线承载的配置信息。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述终端设备确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。这里，所述第二无线承载为与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。这里，终端设备和第二网络设备之间被暂停的通信业务可由终端设备通过第二无线承载继续执行，保证了通信业务的业务连续性，可提升双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述终端设备根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备暂停或停止通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备之间的通信。所述终端设备通过所述第二无线承载传输与所述第一无线承载上的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备暂停或停止与所述第一辅小区在第一链路上的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的通信。
这里，终端设备仅暂停在上行链路或者下行链路上的通信，可保证终端设备与第二网络设备之间一些关键信息的传输不会被暂停，从而减少双连接的去激活对终端设备的业务执行能力的影响。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括以下至少一个：请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级、双连接中断时长。这里，终端设备可通过上述第一辅助信息请求第一网络设备为其配置更加适用的无线承载，可避免因第一网络设备配置的无线承载的不合理带来的终端设备能力下降的问题。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级包括SCG承载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备接收所述第一网络设备或第二网络设备发送的第三辅助信息，并根据所述第三辅助信息用于进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备根据所述多个优先级信息、所述一个或者多个无线承载类型信息和所述一个或者多个无线承载的标识信息中的任一项确定。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发业务的业务类型，所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。这里，为第一网络设备发送上述第一辅助信息，可使得第一网络设备能够更加准确的判定上述终端设备是否需要进行双连接的去激活。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者。所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息。终端设备根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备恢复通过与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载的通信。或者，终端设备将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道由MCG恢复为 第一小区组，和/或，将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分裂阈值由第二阈值修改成第三阈值。这里，所述第三阈值小于所述第二阈值，所述第一小区组为最近一次去激活或者挂起双连接时所述主通道对应的小区组。或者，终端设备恢复与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述终端设备根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备暂停通过第二无线承载与第一网络设备的通信，所述第二无线承载与终端设备与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载相关联，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第一网络设备之间的无线承载。所述终端设备激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备激活或者恢复与所述第一辅小区之间在第二链路上的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种双连接管理的方法。该方法适用于第一网络设备。第一网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第一消息。其中，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起；
第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送响应所述第一消息的第二消息，其中，所述第二消息用于终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活该第一辅小区集合，或者，或者挂起与第一辅小区集合之间的连接，所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被暂停通过第一无线承载进行通信的第一链路。或者，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被暂停通信的第一链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收第二辅助信息。所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发 业务的业务类型、所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三辅助信息，所述第三辅助信息进行用于所述终端设备进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备根据请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级中的任一项确定。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级中包括SCG承载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备向所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备发送第五消息，其中，所述第五消息用于所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备确定与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，其中，所述第四消息用于终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被激活或者恢复的通过第一无线承载进行通信的第二链路，或者，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被激活或者恢复通信的第二链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第六消息，其中，所述第六消息用于所述第二网络设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第七消息，其中，所述第七消息用于所述第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供了一种双连接管理方法，该方法适用于第二网络设备。第二网络设备接收第一网络设备发送的第六消息或者第七消息。所述第二网络设备根据所述第六消息去激活或者挂起双连接。或者，所述第二网络设备根据所述第七消息激活或者恢复双连接。这里，第二网络设备也进行双连接模式的去激活或者激活，这样可避免在终端设备已经去激活双连接的情况下，第二网络设备仍然继续向终端设备发送数据或者信令所带来的通信资源的浪费，或者，可避免在第二网络设备和终端设备未同步激活导致的通 信暂停等问题，可提升通信资源的利用率。
结合第三方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二网络设备去激活或者挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接。或者，所述第二网络设备断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第三方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二网络设备确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述第二网络设备确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。其中，所述第二无线承载为所述第二网络设备与第一无线网络之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第三方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站，或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供了一种双连接管理方法，该方法适用于终端设备。终端设备确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。终端设备确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。其中，所述第二无线承载为与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
在本申请实施例中，预先为终端设备和第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载配置了关联的第二无线承载。使得第一无线承载上因去激活双连接所暂停或者停止通信业务得以在第二无线承载上继续执行，从而避免去激活双连接所造成的通信业务的终端给终端设备带来的影响，保证了双连接的业务连续性，提升了双连接技术的实用性和适用性。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述终端设备根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。终端设备去激活或挂起双连接。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第二消息。终端设备根据所述第二消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，终端设备保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备暂停或者停止通过第一无线承载与第二网络设备之间的目标通信业务。终端设备通过所述第二无线承载传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的目标通信业务。所述终端设备通过所述第二无线承载在所述第一链路上传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息，并根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，终端设备恢复通过所述第一无线承载传输与第二网络设备之间的通信业务。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述终端设备根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述终端设备激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第四方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
第五方面，提供了一种双连接管理方法，该方法适用于第一网络设备。第一网络设备确定第五消息。第一网络设备向所述终端设备和第二网络设备发送所述第五消息。其中，所述第五消息用于所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备确定与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间无线承载，所述第二无线承载为与所述终端设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送响应所述第一消息的第二消息，所述第二消息用于所述终端设备去激活或者 挂起双连接。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备接收所述终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。第一网络设备向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，所述第四消息用于所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括第一链路指示信息，该第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行通信时将要被暂停第一链路。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息包括第二链路指示信息，该第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被恢复通信的第二链路。
结合第五方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路，所述第二链路为上行链路或者下行链路。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种双连接的管理方法，该方法适用于第二网络设备。所述第二网络设备接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述第二网络设备根据第五消息确定第二无线承载，其中，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述第二网络设备与终端设备之间被暂停的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，接收来自所述第一网络设备的第六消息。第二网络设备根据所述第六消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起，或者，根据所述第七消息进行双连接模式的激活或者恢复。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第六消息包括：指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合之间的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第二网络设备去激活或挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二网络设备暂停通过所述第一无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述第二网络设备通过所述第二无线承载与所述终端设备进行通信。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，第二网络设备获取第一网络设备发送的第七消息。所述第二网络设备根据所述第七消息激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二网络设备激活或者恢复与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第六方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二网络设备暂停通过所述第二无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述第二网络设备激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述终 端设备的通信。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述收发单元用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述处理单元用于去激活或挂起双连接。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于根据第二消息去激活或挂起双连接。所述第二消息来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，上述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活第一辅小区集合。或者上述指示信息用于指示挂起与第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，处理单元保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，处理单元保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，处理单元暂停或停止通过与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载的通信。或者，处理单元将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道设置为主小区组MCG，和/或，处理单元将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分离阈值由第一阈值修改成为第二阈值。这里，所述第二阈值大于第一阈值。或者，处理单元暂停与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM，其中，所述第一辅小区为与所述第二网络设备进行通信的辅小区。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元保存所述第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息。或者，所述处理单元保存所述第一无线承载的配置信息。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述处理单元确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。这里，所述第二无线承载为与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述处理单元根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元暂停或停止通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备之间的通信。所述收发单元通过所述第二无线承载传输与所述第一无线承载上的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元暂停或停止与所述第一辅小区在第一链路上的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括以下至少一个：请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级、双连接中断时长。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级包括SCG承载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于接收所述第一网络设备或第二网络设备发送的第三辅助信息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第三辅助信息进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备根据所述多个优先级信息、所述一个或者多个无线承载类型信息和所述一个或者多个无线承载的标识信息中的任一项确定。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述第一网络设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发业务的业务类型，所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者。所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述第一网络设备发送第三消息。所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息。所述处理单元根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于恢复通过与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载的通信。或者，所述处理单元用于将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道由MCG恢复为第一小区组，和/或，将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分裂阈值由第二阈值修改成第三阈值。这里，所述第三阈值小于所述第二阈值，所述第一小区组为最近一次去激活或者挂起双连接时所述主通道对应的小区组。或者，所述处理单元用于恢复与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述处理单元用于根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于暂停通过第二无线承载与第一网络设备的通信，所述第二无线承载与终端设备与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载相关联，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第一网络设备之间的无线承载。所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复与所述第一辅小区之间在第二链路上的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第七方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
关于第七方面或第七方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第一方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述收发单元用于接收所述终端设备发送的第一消息。其中，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述收发单元用于向所述终端设备发送第二消息，其中，所述第二消息用于所述处理单元进行去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被暂停通过第一无线承载进行通信的第一链路。或者，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被暂停通信的第一链路。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收第二辅助信息。所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发业务的业务类型、所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送第三辅助信息，所述第三辅助信息进行用于所述终端设备进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述处理单元根据所述请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级中的任一项确定。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级中包括SCG承 载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备发送第五消息，其中，所述第五消息用于所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备确定与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，其中，所述第四消息用于终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被激活或者恢复的通过第一无线承载进行通信的第二链路，或者，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被激活或者恢复通信的第二链路。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述第二网络设备发送第六消息，其中，所述第六消息用于所述第二网络设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元还用于向所述第二网络设备发送第七消息，其中，所述第七消息用于所述第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
关于第八方面或第八方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第三方面中的第二网络设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述收发单元用于接收第一网络设备发送的第六消息或者第七消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第六消息去激活或者挂起双连接。或者，所述处理单元用于根据所述第七消息激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第九方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于去激活或者挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接。或者，所述处理单元用于断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第九方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述处理单元还还用于确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。其中，所述第二无线承载为所述第二网络设备与第一无线网络之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第九方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网 络设备为辅基站，或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
关于第九方面或第九方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第四方面中的终端设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述收发单元用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述处理单元用于去激活或挂起双连接。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第二消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第二消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，所述处理单元用于保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于暂停或者停止通过第一无线承载与第二网络设备之间的目标通信业务。所述收发单元用于通过所述第二无线承载传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的目标通信业务。所述收发单元用于通过所述第二无线承载在所述第一链路上传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于向第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于恢复通过所述第一无线承载传输与第二网络设备之间的通信业务。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述处理单元用于根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
关于第十方面或第十方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第四方面或第四方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第五方面中的第一网络设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述处理单元用于确定第五消息。所述收发单元用于向所述终端设备和第二网络设备发送所述第五消息。其中，所述第五消息用于所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备确定与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间无线承载，所述第二无线承载为与所述终端设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收所述终端设备发送的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第一消息的第二消息，所述第二消息用于所述终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收所述终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。所述收发单元还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，所述第四消息用于所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第 一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括第一链路指示信息，该第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行通信时将要被暂停第一链路。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息包括第二链路指示信息，该第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被恢复通信的第二链路。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路，所述第二链路为上行链路或者下行链路。
关于第十一方面或第十一方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第五方面或第五方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为第六方面中的第二网络设备。该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元。所述收发单元用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第五消息确定第二无线承载，其中，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述第二网络设备与终端设备之间被暂停的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于接收来自所述第一网络设备的第六消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第六消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起，或者，根据所述第七消息进行双连接模式的激活或者恢复。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第六消息包括：指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合之间的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于去激活或挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于暂停通过所述第一无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述收发单元用于通过所述第二无线承载与所述终端设备进行通信。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元用于获取第一网络设备发送的第七消息。所述处理单元用于根据所述第七消息激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元用于暂停通过所述第二无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述处理单元用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述终端设备的通信。
关于第十二方面或第十二方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第六方面或第六方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十三方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为终端设备本身，也可为终端设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括存储器、处理器、和收发器。其中，该处理器用于调用存储器存储的代码执行上述第一方面或者第四方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法。
第十四方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为第一网络设备本身，也可为第一网络设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括存储器、处理器、和收发器。其中，该处理器用于调用存储器存储的代码执行上述第二方面或者第五方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法。
第十五方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为第二网络设备本身，也可为第二网络设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括存储器、处理器、和收发器。其中，该处理器用于调用存储器存储的代码执行上述第三方面或者第六方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法。
第十六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为终端设备本身，也可为终端设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括：处理器和接口电路。该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器。该处理器用于运行上述代码指令以实现上述第一方面或者第三方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第一方面或者第四方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第十七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为第一网络设备本身，也可为第一网络设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括：处理器和接口电路。该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器。该处理器用于运行上述代码指令以实现上述第二方面或者第五方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第二方面或者第五方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第十八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可为第一网络设备本身，也可为第一网络设备内部的如芯片等元件或者模块。该通信装置包括：处理器和接口电路。该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器。该处理器用于运行上述代码指令以实现上述第三方面或者第六方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第三方面或者第六方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第十九方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在计算机上运行时，实现上述第一方面或者第四方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第一方面或者第四方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第二十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在计算机上运行时，实现上述第二方面或者第五方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第二方面或者第五方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第二十一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在计算机上运行时，实现上述第三方面或者第六方面中任意一种可行的实现方式所提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现上述第三方面或者第六方面提供的 双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果(或者优点)。
第二十二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或者第四方面提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现第一方面或者第四方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果。
第二十三方面，本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二方面或者第五方面提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现第二方面或者第五方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果。
第二十四方面，本申请实施例提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三方面或者第六方面提供的双连接管理方法，也能实现第三方面或者第六方面提供的双连接管理方法所具备的有益效果。
第二十五方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，该通信系统包括上述第七方面、第八方面和第九方面所描述的通信装置，或者，上述第十方面、第十一方面和第十二方面所描述的通信装置，或者，上述第十三方面、第十四方面和第十五方面所描述的通信装置，或者，上述第十六方面、第十七方面和第十八方面所描述的通信装置。
通过本申请实施例，可提升双连接的激活和去激活的效率，保证了双连接下的通信业务的连续性，提升了双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统结构示意图；
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法一流程示意图；
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图；
图9是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置一结构示意图；
图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图；
图11是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图；
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图；
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图；
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。
本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法适用于支持与5G系统(又称为new radio NR系统)建立双连接的长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统或5G系统，还适用于其他采用各种无线接入技术并能够与5G系统建立双连接的无线通信系统，例如采用码分多址 (code division multiple access，CDMA)，频分多址(frequency division multiple access，FDMA)，时分多址(time division multiple access，TDMA)，正交频分多址(orthogonal frequency division multiple access，OFDMA)，单载波频分多址(single carrier-frequency division multiple access，SC-FDMA)，多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)等接入技术的系统，以及未来通信系统，此处不作限定。
本申请实施例所涉及到的网络设备是一种部署在无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)中用以为终端设备提供无线通信功能的设备。上述网络设备可以为各种形式的宏基站，微基站，中继站，接入点基站控制器，收发节点(transmission reception point,TRP)等等，也可为由一个或多个基站和与之建立通信连接的控制器共同组成的控制设备，此处不作限制。为方便描述，本申请实施例后续的描述中，将以网络设备统一进行描述。本申请所涉及到的终端设备(user equipment，UE)为支持双连接模式并且可以为向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的无线设备。上述无线设备可以是支持双连接并且具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备，经无线接入网与一个或多个核心网进行通信的移动终端。例如，上述无线终端可以为移动电话、计算机、平板电脑、个人数码助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、移动互联网设备(mobile Internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备和电子书阅读器(e-book reader)等。又如，上述无线设备也可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动设备。再如，上述无线设备还可以为移动站(mobile station)、接入点(access point)。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中涉及到的第一网络设备(又可称为主网络设备)和第二网络设备(又可称为辅网络设备)均可以是LTE系统、5G系统或是其他无线通信系统下的网络设备。本申请实施例中涉及到的终端设备也可以是LTE系统、5G系统或是其他无线通信系统下的终端设备，本申请不做具体限定。为了方便理解和描述，本申请实施例将以第一网络设备、第二网络设备和终端设备均处于5G系统下为例。
为了方便对本申请实施例的理解，下面将对本申请实施例涉及到的多个概念进行简单的描述。
1、双连接
在LTE系统、NR系统等无线通信系统中，为了给终端装置提供更高的数据传输速率以及利用宏/微组网来提高频谱效率和负载平衡，新提出了一种双连接技术。请参见图1，图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统一结构示意图。如图1所示，在NR系统下，支持双连接的终端设备可以同时与两个网络设备建立通信连接。上述两个网络设备中包括一个主网络设备(如主基站(master gNB，MgNB))和一个辅网络设备(如辅基站(secondary gNB，SgNB))。主网络设备和辅网络设备之间可通过非理性的回程线路(backhaul)连接。在如图1所示的通信系统中，支持双连接的终端设备至少配置有两个小区组，一个是主小区组(master cell group，MCG)，一个是辅小区组(secondary cell group，SCG)。主小区组指的是上述主网络设备相关联的小区组。上述主小区组中包括了一个主小区(primary cell，PCell)以及零个或者多个辅小区(secondary cell，SCell)。上述主小区为与终端装置建立RRC连接的小区，该主小区配置有物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)资源。上述辅小区配置有PUCCH资源。上述辅小区组指的是与辅网络设备相关 联的小区组。该辅小区组中包括了一个主辅小区(primary secondary cell，PSCell)和零个或者多个辅小区。上述主辅小区为上述辅小区组中唯一配置有PUCCH资源的辅小区。
2、无线承载(radio bearer，RB)
简单的来说，无线承载就是无线通信系统中的无线逻辑资源的集合体，它可以为用户提供终端装置到陆地无线接入网(或者说核心网)的数据连接能力。根据承载的信息的种类，无线承载可分为信令无线承载(signaling radio bearer，SRB)和数据无线承载(data radio bearer，DRB)两种。上述信令无线承载主要用于传输，上述数据无线承载主要用于传输数据。本申请实施例中所涉及到的无线承载主要指代的是数据无线承载。实际应用中，结合双连接下的用户面的架构，可对上述数据无线承载做进一步的划分。例如，仅由主网络设备提供服务的数据无线承载可称为MCG承载。仅由辅网络设备提供的数据无线承载称之为SCG承载。同时由主网络设备和辅网络设备提供服务的数据无线承载称之为分离(split)承载。
3、无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)状态，终端设备有3种RRC状态：RRC连接态(connected态)、RRC空闲态(idle态)和非激活态(inactive态)。
RRC连接态(或，也可以简称为连接态。在本文中，“连接态”和“RRC连接态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备与网络建立了RRC连接，可以进行数据传输。
RRC空闲态(或，也可以简称为空闲态。在本文中，“空闲态”和“RRC空闲态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备没有与网络建立RRC连接，基站没有存储该终端设备的上下文。如果终端设备需要从RRC空闲态进入RRC连接态，则需要发起RRC连接建立过程。
RRC非激活态(或，也可以简称为非激活态。在本文中，“去活动态”、“去激活态”、“非激活态”、“RRC非激活态”和“RRC去激活态”，是同一概念，这几种称呼可以互换)：终端设备之前进入了RRC连接态，然后基站释放了RRC连接，但是基站保存了该终端设备的上下文。如果该终端设备需要从RRC非激活态再次进入RRC连接态，则需要发起RRC连接恢复过程(或者称为RRC连接重建立过程)。RRC恢复过程相对于RRC建立过程来说，时延更短，信令开销更小。但是基站需要保存终端设备的上下文，会占用基站的存储开销。
4、双卡设备
所谓的双卡设备即支持双卡双待功能的终端设备。以手机这一终端设备为例，双卡手机可以插入两张SIM(subscriber identity module，用户识别模块)卡，而且能同时待机。这两张SIM卡中一张称为主卡，一张称为副卡。换句话说，就是用户使用GSM双卡双待手机，可以在一部手机上同时使用两个GSM网络的手机号，使用CDMA双卡双待手机，可以同时使用两个CDMA网络的手机号。实际应用中，双卡终端设备又可以划分成以下两种：
(1)双接收模块和双发送模块的双卡终端设备
对于这种类型的终端设备，其能够同时通过不同运营商提供的多个移动网络进行信息的接收或者发送，并且其还可以同时监视两个网络中的寻呼消息。
(2)双接收模块和单发送模块的双卡终端设备
对于这种类型的终端设备，由于其仅具有单个发送模块，因此其通过不同运营商提供的多个移动网络进行信息传输是非常困难的。不过，实际应用中，从成本效率的观点来看， 双卡终端设备通常还通过在两个SIM之间共享的多个接收模块和单个发送模块来实现的。
5、去激活双连接
在本申请实施例中，去激活双连接、去激活辅小区组或者去激活辅网络设备(secondary node,SN)是等价的说法，其特征主要是将终端设备当前与SN或辅小区组之间的数据传输暂停，但不释放终端设备与SN或辅小区组之间已经建立的RRC连接或者无线链路，具体的，可以只暂停上行业务的传输，或者只暂停下行业务的传输，或者上下行业务都暂停。另外，在本申请实施例中，去激活和挂起为等价描述，激活与恢复为等价描述，为了表述简洁，后续统一使用去激活或者激活进行描述。
在如图1所示的通信系统中，在终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备通过双连接进行通信。一般的，在需要进行双连接的去激活(又称挂起)时，第一网络设备可向终端设备下发无线资源控制重配置消息以释放终端设备与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接或者无线链路。当需要进行双连接的激活时，第一网络设备会再次向终端设备下发新的RRC重配置消息以重新建立终端设备与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接或者无线链路。由于终端设备与辅网络设备之间的通信连接的释放或者重新建立存在较大的时延，会导致终端设备无法快速的进行双连接的去激活或者激活，也同样使得因双连接的去激活而被暂停的业务无法快速恢复和执行。
本申请实施例提供的方法所要解决的技术问题是：如何提升双连接的激活和去激活的效率以及如何保证双连接下的业务的连续执行。
实施例一
请参见图2，图2是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法一流程示意图。该双连接管理方法适用于上述图1所示的无线通信系统。由图2可知，该方法包括以下步骤：
S110，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息。
在一些可行的实施方式中，在终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备之间基于双连接进行通信这一场景下，当终端设备确定需要去激活双连接(又可称之为挂起双连接，在后文中，去激活和挂起表述相同的含义，可互相替换使用)时，其可确定出第一消息，并将该第一消息发送给第一网络设备。这里，上述第一消息用于指示或者请求进行双连接的去激活或者挂起。
可选的，在一种可能的实现中，终端设备为双卡设备，终端设备可以根据主卡和副卡的业务情况判断是否需要去激活双连接，例如，当终端设备检测到其副卡有发起业务请求时，如信息管理系统(information management system，IMS)注册或者短消息服务(short message service，SMS)业务对应的业务请求等，则终端设备可确定需要进行双连接的去激活。又例如，当终端设备确定副卡执行的业务所需要的时长大于预设的时长时，也可确定需要去激活或挂起双连接。在另一种可能的实现中，终端设备为单卡设备，当终端设备根据其当前的业务量和网络负载等信息确定无需使用双连接时，也可确定需要进行双连接的去激活。需要说明的是，终端设备可以根据实际使用情况来判断是否需要去激活或挂起双连接，以上判断场景仅为举例，本申请实施例对此不作限定。
在一种可选的实现方式中，上述第一消息主要用于提醒或者提示第一网络设备其需要进行双连接的去激活。即终端设备仅是通过上述第一消息去通知第一网络设备其已开始或 者即将开始进行双连接的去激活，并且不需要第一网络设备进一步确认其是否可以进行双连接的去激活。即终端设备在向第一网络设备发送上述第一消息后，可直接进行双连接的去激活，并不需要等待网络设备反馈确认消息才去激活双连接。这样可简化终端设备去激活双连接的过程，提升双连接的去激活效率。
在另一种可选的实现方式中，上述第一消息主要用于终端设备请求第一网络设备确认其是否可以进行双连接的去激活。具体实现中，第一网络设备在接收到终端设备发送的第一消息后，可根据终端设备的业务状态、网络状态等信息判定终端设备是否可以进行双连接的去激活。可选的，本申请实施例还包括步骤S1101，第一网络设备确定终端设备可以进行双连接的去激活，则向终端设备发送第二消息以通知终端设备其可进行双连接的去激活。若第一网络设备确定终端设备不可以进行双连接的去激活，则可不向终端设备反馈任何信息，或者，向终端设备发送一个否定信息以通知终端设备其不可进行双连接的去激活。这里，需要说明的是，终端设备也可将直接地或者通过第一网络设备间接地将上述第一消息发送给第二网络设备。第二网络设备可采用和第一网络设备相同的方法确定并告知终端设备其是否可以去激活双连接。在下文中，将以第一网络设备接收第一消息并反馈第二消息为例进行描述。向第一网络设备发送第一消息以请求第一网络设备确认能否进行双连接的去激活，可避免终端设备因误判造成的不必要的双连接的去激活，进而提升终端设备在双连接状态下的业务的连续性。
进一步的，具体实现中，终端设备可通过终端能力更新消息或者终端能力临时改变消息发送上述第一消息。或者，终端设备还可通过各种媒体接入控制元素(media access control element，MAC CE)来承载上述第一消息。例如，终端设备可新生成一个特定的媒体接入控制元素来发送上述第一消息，终端设备也可通过已有的如缓冲状态报告(buffer status report，BSR)等媒体接入控制元素将上述第一消息发送给上述第一网络设备或者第二网络设备。例如，终端设备可将BSR中的某一预留比特置0，然后将该BSR作为请求或者指示去激活双连接的第一消息。可以理解到的是，上述第一消息也可以承载于其他消息或者信令，本申请不作具体限制。
需要说明的是，S110为可选步骤，步骤S1101不依赖步骤S110，具体来说，就是在一种可能的实现中，终端设备也可直接从第一网络设备或者第二网络设备处接收上述第二消息。即第一网络设备和第二网络设备可直接发送上述第二消息，而不是在接收到上述第一消息之后才发送上述第二消息。
在一种可选的方式中，在第一终端设备发送上述第一消息之前，第一终端设备还可向上述第一网络设备发送一个辅助信息(为方便理解和区别，下文以第一辅助信息代替描述)。上述第一辅助信息中可包括终端设备请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级以及双连接中断时长中的一项或者多项。这里，上述承载类型具体可包括MCG承载、SCG承载或者split承载。
具体实现中，上述第一辅助信息中包括请求配置的承载类型指的就是上述第一辅助信息中包括有终端设备请求第一网络设备为其配置的无线承载的类型。比如，上述第一辅助信息中包括split承载，即终端设备请求第一网络设备将其使用的无线承载配置为split承载。上述第一辅助信息中包括优选配置的承载类型意指上述第一辅助信息中包括的一种或者多 种无线承载的类型是终端设备优选或者倾向使用的无线承载的类型。比如，上述第一辅助信息中包括split承载和MCG承载，则表明终端设备优选或者倾向使用split承载或者MCG承载。上述第一辅助信息中包括不同承载的配置优先级指的是上述第一辅助信息中可包括多个类型相同或者不同的无线承载对应的多个配置优先级。例如，假设上述第一辅助信息包括第一MCG承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二MCG承载对应的第二配置优先级、第一SCG承载对应的第三配置优先级和第二SCG承载对应的第四配置优先级。其中，第四配置优先级最高，第一配置优先级最低。终端设备发送的第一辅助信息包括这些内容，则说明终端设备请求第一网络设备优先为其配置第二SCG承载作为无线承载。若无法为其配置第二SCG承载，则可为其配置第一SCG承载，以此类推。上述第一辅助信息中包括不同承载类型的配置优先级指的是上述第一辅助信息中包括了终端设备要求或者倾向于使用的一种或者多种无线承载的类型，并且不同无线承载的类型对应有不同的配置优先级。例如，上述第一辅助信息中可包括SCG承载、MCG承载和Split承载这三种无线承载的类型，并且MCG承载对应第一配置优先级，SCG承载对应第二配置优先级，split承载对应第三配置优先级。其中，第三配置优先级最高。终端设备发送包含这些内容的第一辅助信息时，就是请求第一网络设备优先为其配置split承载。在无法配置split承载的情况下，可优先为其配置SCG承载。在SCG承载也无法配置的情况下，可为其配置MCG承载。上述第一辅助信息中包括的双连接中断时长可用于辅助第一网络设备确定终端设备适用的无线承载。
换个说法，就是终端设备可通过上述第一辅助信息向网络上报自己请求网络配置的承载类型(如MCG承载，SCG承载，Split承载等)，或者，向网络上报自己优选的或倾向的承载类型。或者，对多种无线承载的配置倾向的优先级进行指示。优选地，为了保证在双连接激活或者去激活期间的业务连续性，终端设备可以上报优选的无线承载(preferred bearer)为分离承载。或上报分离承载的配置优先级高于辅小区组承载。此外，终端设备还可以上报预估的执行双连接的数据传输时会发生中断的中断时长，将估计的中断时长上报给网络。例如，对于双卡的终端设来说，终端设备可以根据副卡的业务类型判断双连接的中断时间，并将中断时间的时长上报网络。例如，导致双连接去激活的业务是SMS业务，则终端设备可上报中断时长为1s-3s。
进一步的，第一网络设备在接收上述第一辅助信息后，可根据上述第一辅助信息中包括的请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级、双连接中断时长确定出适用于终端设备的无线承载，并将该无线承载对应的承载配置信息发送给终端设备，以为终端设备配置其优选的或者倾向的无线承载。例如，假设终端设备发送的第一辅助信息中终端设备请求配置的承载类型为split承载。第一网络设备在接收到上述第一辅助信息后，确定终端设备可被配置split承载，则第一网络设备可确定出一个第一split承载对应的承载配置信息，并将该承载配置信息发送给终端设备。终端设备即可根据该承载配置信息确定出一个可用的第一split承载，并通过该第一split承载进行数据或者信令的传输。
这里，终端设备可通过上述第一辅助信息请求第一网络设备为其配置更加适用的无线承载，可避免因第一网络设备配置的无线承载的不合理带来的终端设备能力下降的问题。
在另一种可选的实现方式中，终端设备还可向第一网络设备发送第二辅助信息。这里， 上述第二辅助信息中具体可包括以下至少一项：去激活或者挂起的原因信息、激活或者挂起的时长信息、业务的业务类型信息和触发业务的业务时长信息。这里，上述触发业务为触发终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务。如前文提及的副卡上的IMS注册或者SMS业务等。第一网络设备在接收到上述第一辅助信息后，可结合上述第一辅助信息判定终端设备当前时刻是否能够去激活双连接。为第一网络设备发送上述第一辅助信息，可使得第一网络设备能够更加准确的判定上述终端设备是否需要进行双连接的去激活。
在又一种可选的实现方式中，第一网络设备可通过媒体接入控制元素(MAC CE)或者物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)信令等载体发送上述第二消息。具体的，上述第二消息可以为包含有多个指示比特的去激活MAC CE。这个去激活MAC CE中包含的每个指示比特与终端设备的辅小区组中每个辅小区一一对应。一个指示比特用于指示一个辅小区是否需要去激活。例如，假设指示比特B1对应辅小区cell1。当指示比特B1的值为1时，可表征辅小区cell1需要被去激活。当指示比特B1等于0时，可表征辅小区cell1保持当前状态。换一句话说，就是在双连接去激活后，辅小区组的已经激活的辅小区的状态变成去激活状态，辅小区组的未激活的辅小区的状态继续保持去激活状态。如下表1-1，表1-1是本申请实施例提供的一种辅小区去激活或者激活的媒体接入控制元素。在该表中包含了第1-31个辅小区对应的31个指示比特，包括c1到c31，分别用于指示对应辅小区的状态。例如，当比特置为1时代表激活对应的辅小区，当比特置为0时代表去激活对应的辅小区。又例如，在去激活的过程中，如果某个指示比特置为1，则表示该指示比特对应的辅小区应该被去激活。如果某个指示比特置为0，则表示该指示比特对应的辅小区保持当前状态。在后续激活的过程中，如果某个指示比特置为1，则表示该指示比特对应的辅小区应该被激活。如果某个指示比特置为0，则表示该指示比特对应的辅小区应该保持当前状态。需要说明的是，以上仅为MAC CE的一种应用方式，通过本申请实施例提供的通信方法，第一网络设备可以通过MAC CE来指示每个辅小区的状态，其中比特位的含义也可以有其他设定方式，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
表1-1
c7 c6 c5 c4 c3 c2 c1 R
c15 c14 c13 c12 c11 c10 c9 c8
c23 c22 c21 c20 c19 c18 c17 c16
c31 c30 c29 c28 c27 c26 c25 c24
结合上述实现方式，进一步的，上述第二消息中还可包括一个指示信息。该指示信息可用于指示终端设备去激活第一辅小区集合或者挂起与第一辅小区集合的连接。这里，上述第一小区集合中可包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区(为了方便区别，下文将以第一辅小区代替描述)。在第一小区集合中包括主辅小区和或者对个第一辅小区的情况下，当第二消息以表1-1所示的MAC CE为载体时，指示比特R可定义为主辅小区对应的指示比特。当主辅小区对应的指示比特R和一个或者多个除所述主辅小区以外的辅小区对应的指示比特为1，则指示终端设备去激活双连接。当这些指示比特为0时，则维持这些辅小区当前状态不变。在第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区情况下，当第二 消息以MAC CE为载体时，若表1-1所示的MAC CE中主辅小区对应的指标比特R值为1，则指示终端设备去激活双连接，即将辅小区组中的所有辅小区都去激活。
可选的，主辅小区的激活或者去激活指示的设计可以使用类似上述表1-1中使用指示比特R的方式，也可以使用专门的辅小区激活或者去激活的MAC CE，并为该MAC CE分配专门的逻辑信道标示。
换一句话说，即当终端设备根据上述第二消息确定辅小区组中的主辅小区和一个或者多个第一辅小区需要去激活或者挂起时，才可确定第一网络设备允许其进行双连接的去激活。或者，当终端设备根据上述第二消息确定辅小区组中的主辅小区需要去激活时，才可确定第一网络设备允许其进行双连接的去激活。或者说，这里扩展了辅小区激活或者去激活机制。当终端设备收到辅小区和主辅小区均去激活或者激活的指示时，则确认为去激活双连接或者激活双连接。或者，当终端设备收到主辅小区的激活或者去激活指示，则确认激活或去激活双连接。
S120，终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
在一些可行的实施方式中，终端设备在发送完上述第一消息或者接收到第一网络设备发发送的第二消息后，可去激活或者挂起双连接。具体来说，就是终端设备在进行双连接的去激活之后，其与第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接会继续保持，而其与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接则会被去激活或者挂起。或者，终端设备在进行双连接的去激活之后，其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接会继续保持，其与第二网络设备之间的无线链路会被断开。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中提供了多种去激活双连接的方法，下面将结合不同场景对不同的去激活方法进行简单的描述。
去激活方法一：
在本方法中，终端设备可以暂停或停止与第二网络设备之间通过辅小区组中的部分或者全部辅小区所进行的通信。
具体的，终端设备在确定可以进行双连接模式的去激活之后，可先根据其对应的系统配置信息确定出其对应的辅小区组中包括的N1个辅小区。然后，终端设备可从上述N1个辅助区中确定N2个第一辅小区。这里，N2小于或者等于N1，上述第一辅小区为能够与第二网络设备进行通信的辅小区。也就是说终端设备可通过上述第一辅小区与第二网络设备进行通信。其后，终端设备可暂停通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间进行的通信。具体的，就是终端设备可去激活或者挂起通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接。或者，终端设备可断开通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的无线链路。同时，终端设备还可继续保持对上述辅小区组中的主辅小区的无线链路监测(radio link monitoring，RLM)。
终端设备在暂停与第一辅小区通信的同时，仍然保存其通过上述第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接或者无线链路所占用的通信资源，这样可使得终端设备在后续进行双连接的激活过程中无需重新分通信资源，进而提升双连接的去激活和激活效率。
去激活方法二：
在本方法中，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载所进行 的通信。实际应用中，上述第一无线承载的类型包括SCG承载和split承载。
在一种实现方式中，上述第一无线承载为SCG承载。终端设备在确定需要进行双连接的去激活之后，可暂停或者停止终端设备与第二网络设备之间基于SCG承载所进行的通信。这里所描述的通信包括信令交互和/或数据传输。需要说明的是，这里终端设备仅暂停或者停止基于SCG承载所进行的通信，并未释放终端设备与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接或者无线链路所对应的通信资源，也并未删除上述SCG承载。
在另一种可行的实现方式中，上述第一无线承载为split承载。终端设备在确定需要去激活双连接之后，可暂停或者停止终端设备与第二网络设备之间通过split承载所进行的通信。具体的来说，就是终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间通过split承载中的SCG侧的承载所实现的通信，其与第一网络设备之间通过split承载中的MCG侧的承载所实现的通信并未受到影响。进一步的，在暂停或者停止split承载上的通信的同时，终端设备还可将split承载的主通道(primary path)由正在使用的小区组设置为主小区组MCG。或者，终端设备也可将split承载对应的上行数据分离阈值(ul-data split threshold)由当前正在使用的第一阈值设定为第二阈值。这里，上述第二阈值要远远大于上述第一阈值。优选的，上述第二阈值可以为无穷大。这里，将上行数据分离阈值设置为无穷大，可充分保证去激活双连接之后split承载的主通道为MCG，保证了通过split承载传输的业务的连续性。这里需要说明的是，终端设备可以根据上述上行数据分离阈值确定split承载对应的主通道是MCG还是SCG。在具体实现中，当终端设备根据当前网络状态等信息确定出的上行分离参数等于或者大于上述上行数据分离阈值时，则可确定split承载的主通道为SCG和MCG。当终端设备确定出上行分离参数小于上述上行数据分离阈值时，则可确定split承载的主通道为MCG。终端设备将split承载对应的上行数据分离阈值设置为远远大于第一阈值的第二阈值，可充分保证终端设备确定出的split承载的主通道为MCG，从而可减少因split承载中的SCG侧承载被停用所导致的通信暂停的影响。
进一步的，在暂停或者停止通过SCG承载或者split承载与第二网络设备进行的通信的同时，终端设备还可保存SCG承载或者split承载所对应的数据传输状态信息。这里，上述数据传输状态信息主要包括已经成功传输的数据包的信息和未成功传输的数据包的信息等。或者，在暂停通过SCG承载或者split承载与第二网络设备进行的通信的同时，终端设备还可保存SCG承载或者split承载所对应的配置信息，这里，上述配置信息包括split承载的主通道的信息和预设的上行数据分离阈值等，此处不做具体限定。
终端设备仅是暂停了通过SCG承载或者split承载所进行通信，但SCG承载或者split承载并未被删除，因此，在后续进行双连接的激活时，终端设备可继续采用上述SCG承载或者split承载，而无需重新配置新的无线承载，从而提升了双连接的去激活和激活效率，也提升了双连接技术的实用性和适用性。
去激活方法三：
在本方法中，终端设备可以暂停或停止通过辅小区组中的部分或者全部辅小区与第二网络设备之间所进行的上行通信或者下行通信。
上述第二消息包括第一链路指示信息，该第一链路指示信息用于指示终端设备和第二网络设备之间将要被暂停通信的第一链路。这里，上述第一链路包括上行链路或者下行链 路。结合上述第一链路指示信息以及上述去激活方式一的内容可知，终端设备在确定需要去激活双连接之后，可从上述第二消息中确定出上述第一链路指示消息，并根据上述第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是上行链路还是下行链路。若终端设备根据第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是上行链路，则终端设备即可暂停或者停止通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间在上行链路上进行上行通信。若终端设备根据第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是下行链路，则终端设备即可暂停或者停止通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间在下行链路上进行下行通信。具体过程可参见上述去激活方法一中描述的暂停与N2个第一辅小区的通信的过程，此处便不再赘述。
换一句话说，第一网络设备可以在上述第二消息中包含仅去激活终端设备的下行数据的指示信息，或者仅去激活终端设备的上行数据的指示信息，或者去激活终端设备的上下行数据的指示信息。
去激活方法四：
在本方法中，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载所进行的上行通信或者下行通信。实际应用中，上述第一无线承载的类型包括SCG承载和split承载。
如去激活方式三所述，上述第二消息中可包括第一链路指示信息，该第一链路指示信息可用于指示终端设备和第二网络设备之间将要被暂停通信的第一链路。这里，上述第一链路包括上行链路或者下行链路。结合上述第一链路指示信息以及上述去激活方法二的内容可知：
终端设备在确定出需要进行双连接的去激活时，可从上述第二消息中提取出第一链路指示信息，并根据上述第一链路指示信息确定出将要被暂停通信的链路是上行链路还是下行链路。下面，假设上述第一链路指示信息指示的是上行链路。终端设备在确定出将要被暂停的链路是上行链路后，在第一无线承载为SCG承载这一场景下，终端设备可暂停通过SCG承载与第二网络设备在上行链路上进行的上行通信。在第一无线承载为split承载这一场景下，终端设备可暂停通过split承载与第二网络设备在上行链路上进行的上行通信。具体过程可参见上述去激活方法三中所描述的暂停SCG承载或者split承载上的通信的过程，此处便不再赘述。
在上述去激活方法三或者去激活方法四中，终端设备仅暂停在上行链路或者下行链路上的通信，可保证终端设备与第二网络设备之间一些关键信息的传输不会被暂停，从而减少双连接的去激活对终端设备的业务执行能力的影响。
去激活方法五：
在本方法中，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载传输的通信业务，并转由与第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载继续传输该通信业务。
在终端设备进行双连接的去激活之前，可确定出与上述第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载。这里，上述第二无线承载为终端设备和网络设备之间的无线承载。上述第二无线承载用于传输被暂停或停止的第一通信业务，这个第一通信业务指的是终端设备与第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。具体实现中，假设上述第一无线承载为无线承载A。终端设备进行双连接的去激活之前，可从终端设备和第一网络设备之间已经建 立好的MCG承载中挑选出一个MCG承载(优选的，该MCG承载并未被使用)，并将该MCG承载确定为与上述第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载。或者，终端设备也可从第一网络设备处接收第五消息。这里，上述第五消息用于指示与终端设备和第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载。然后，终端设备可根据上述第五消息中包含的无线承载配置信息新建一个MCG承载，并将该新建的MCG承载确定为上述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。这里，需要说明的是，上述已经建立的MCG承载或者新建的MCG承载可为单独的MCG承载，也可为辅节点终结分离承载中的MCG承载(即SN terminated Split Beare中的MCG侧的承载)，此处不做具体限制。后续去激活过程中，上述第二无线承载用于替换终端设备与第二网络设备之间被停用的第一无线承载，从而保证终端设备与第二网络设备之间的通信业务的连续性。
换一种说法，就是第一网络设备或者第二网络设备可以为与辅小区组相关的无线承载确定出与主小区组关联的无线承载。这里，上述与辅小区组关联的无线承载主要包含辅小区组承载、辅小区分离承载(SCG split bearer)、主小区分离承载(MCG Split bearer)和基于辅小区组分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)的无线承载(即bearer with SCG PDCP)。
具体地，对于SCG承载，第一网络设备或者第二网络设备可以为终端设备配置一个关联的MCG承载，该MCG承载可以是终端设备当前已经存在的MCG承载，也可以是终端设备新建立的一个备份的MCG承载。然后，在去激活双连接的情况下，终端设备可将原本映射在SCG承载上进行传输的数据切换到MCG承载或MCG承载的MCG侧的链路上执行传输。在后续激活双连接的情况下，终端设备又可将原本就映射到SCG承载上的数据流继续在原来的SCG承载上传输，而不在上述关联的MCG承载或MCG分离承载上进行传输。
对于SCG分离承载来说，终端设备在去激活双连接的情况下，终端设备可将数据映射到上述备份的MCG承载上执行传输，或者终端设备可仅通过该SCG分离承载的MCG链路上执行数据传输，而不使用SCG侧的链路进行数据传输。
可选的，在上述第一无线承载有关联的第二无线承载的前提下，结合前文去激活方法二的内容可知，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间基于SCG承载进行的通信业务(为方便区别，下午以第二通信业务代替描述)，并保存该SCG承载所对应的数据传输状态信息(为方便区别，下文将以第一数据传输状态信息代替描述)。然后，终端设备可通过上述第二无线承载并按照上述第一数据传输状态信息继续执行上述第二通信业务。
可选的，在上述第一无线承载有关联的第二无线承载的前提下，结合前文去激活方法四的内容可知，终端设备在确定出需要进行双连接的去激活之后，终端设备可暂停通过split承载与第二网络设备进行的通信业务(为方便区别，下文将以第三通信业务代替描述)，并保存该split承载所对应的数据传输状态信息(为方便区别，下文将以第二数据传输状态信息代替描述)。然后，终端设备可通过上述第二无线承载并按照上述第二数据传输状态信息继续执行上述第三通信业务。
进一步的，在暂停通过SCG承载或者split承载并转而使用第二无线承载与第二网络设备进行的通信的同时，终端设备还可保存上述SCG承载或者split承载所对应的配置信息。 该配置信息可用于后续双连接的激活使用。这里，上述配置信息具体可包括split承载的主通道信息和预设的上行数据分离阈值等，此处不做具体限定。
在去激活方法五中，终端设备和第二网络设备之间被暂停的通信业务可由终端设备通过第二无线承载继续执行，保证了通信业务的业务连续性，可提升双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
去激活方法六：
在本方法中，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载传输的上行通信或者下行通信，并转由与第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载继续传输该上行通信或者下行通信。
如上述激活方法五所述，在终端设备确定了第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载的前提下，上述第二消息中还包括用于指示第一链路的第一链路指示信息。该第一链路包括上行链路或者下行链路。下面以第一无线承载为SCG承载为例，对终端设备去激活双连接的过程进行简单的描述。终端设备在接收到上述第二消息后，可根据上述第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是上行链路还是下行链路。若终端设备根据第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是上行链路，则终端设备可暂停或者停止通过SCG承载与第二网络设备之间进行的上行通信。同时，终端设备可保存该SCG承载所对应的数据传输状态信息(为方便区别，下文将以第三数据传输状态信息代替描述)。然后，终端设备可按照上述第三数据传输状态在上述第二无线承载上继续执行原本在第一无线承载上执行的上行通信。若终端设备根据第一链路指示消息确定被暂停或者停止的是下行链路，则终端设备可暂停或者停止通过SCG承载与第二网络设备之间进行的下行通信。同时，终端设备可保存该SCG承载所对应的数据传输状态信息(为方便区别，下文将以第四数据传输状态信息代替描述)。然后，终端设备可按照上述第四数据传输状态在上述第二无线承载上继续执行原本在第一无线承载上执行的下行通信。
在本方法中，第一无线承载为split承载的场景下终端设备去激活双连接的过程与第一无线承载为SCG承载的场景下所执行的去激活双连接的过程类似，本申请便不再赘述。
另外，需要说明的是，若终端设备和第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载仅使用SCG分组数据汇聚层协议，但不使用SCG的空口无线资源的无线承载，则终端设备在进行双连接的去激活过程中，由于终端设备并没有使用SCG的空口无线资源，所以终端设备可以继续使用当前的无线承载。或者，终端设备也可以将原本在该无线承载上执行的通信业务切换到上述第二无线承载上执行。
总的来说，就是终端设备在接收到第一网络设备发送的双连接的去激活的指示信息后，确定执行如下操作中的至少一种：
(1)如果配置辅小区组承载，则停止辅小区承载的数据传输，但维持辅小区承载的数据传输状态。
(2)如果配置分离承载，则停止分离承载在辅小区组的数据传输。和/或，终端设备确定主通道为主小区组，并设置上行数据分离阈值无限大。
(3)去激活当前辅小区组的所有辅小区，但是继续保持辅小区组中的主辅小区的RLM监听。
并且，终端设备在接收到第一网络设备发送的双连接的去激活指示信息后，如果双连接去激活指示信息包含仅去激活下行数据的双连接传输的指示信息，则终端设备根据指示去激活下行数据的双连接模式接收。或者，如果去激活指示信息包含仅去激活终端设备的上行数据的双连接传输的指示信息，则终端设备根据指示信息去激活上行数据的双连接传输方式。或者，如果去激活指示信息包含上下行数据的双连接去激活指示信息，则终端设备根据指示去激活终端设备的上下行数据的双连接传输。
在上述步骤S110和步骤S120中，终端设备在去激活双连接时仅暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间的通信，并不会释放与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接或者无线链路，可保证其后续能够更加快速的激活双连接，提升了双连接的激活和去激活的效率，提升了双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
参见图3，图3是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法另一流程示意图。由图3可知，该方法还包括以下步骤：
S130，第一网络设备向所述第二网络设备发送第六消息。
在一些可行的实施方式中，第一网络设备在接收到上述第一消息并确定终端设备可去激活双连接之后，其可向第二网络设备发送第六消息。该第六消息用于指示第二终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
具体实现中，第一网络设备可通过MAC控制元素或者其他载体将上述第六消息发送给第二网络设备，具体过程参加前文叙述的第一网络设备向终端设备发送第二消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。比如，上述第六消息可以为包含有多个指示比特的激活MAC CE。这个激活MAC CE中包含的每个指示比特与终端设备的辅小区组中每个辅小区一一对应。一个指示比特用于指示一个辅小区是否需要去激活。例如，假设指示比特B1对应辅小区cell1。当指示比特B1的值为1时，可表征辅小区cell1需要被去激活。当指示比特B1等于0时，可表征辅小区cell1保持当前状态。然后，第二网络设备在确认可以进行双连接的去激活或者挂起时，可向第一网络设备发送去激活确认消息，以响应上述第六消息。
S140，第二网络设备去激活双连接。
在一些可行的实现方式中，第二网络设备在接收到上述第六消息后，可去激活或者挂起双连接。这里，可以理解到的是，由于去激活或者挂起双连接的操作主要是针对终端设备和第二网络设备之间的无线承载或者通信链路的操作，因此，针对终端设备和第二网络设备而言，二者去激活的过程是相同的。换一句话说，就是第二网络设备也可执行终端设备执行的去激活双连接操作。例如，假设终端设备采用前文所述的去激活方法一去激活双连接，则第二网络设备也可确定出N2个第一辅小区，并暂停通过上述N2个第一辅小区与终端设备之间进行的通信。这样，在双连接去激活后，则辅小区内的辅小区的状态恢复为上一次去激活前的辅小区的状态，即上一次去激活前为激活状态的辅小区恢复为激活状态，上一次去激活前为去激活状态的辅小区保持为去激活状态。所以，第二网络设备去激活双连接的过程具体可参见前文去激活方法一、去激活方法二、去激活方法三、去激活方法四、去激活方法五以及去激活方法六中所描述去激活双连接的过程，此处不再赘述。这里还需要说明的是，上述在上述去激活方法六所对应的场景中，上述第二网络设备接收到的第六消息中还可包括第一链路指示信息。即第二网络设备在去激活的过程中，也可根据上述第 一链路指示信息确定暂停的是上行通信还是下行通信。
这里，终端设备和第二网络设备均进行双连接模式的去激活，这样可避免在终端设备已经去激活双连接的情况下，第二网络设备仍然继续向终端设备发送数据或者信令所带来的通信资源的浪费，可提升通信资源的利用率。
参见图4，图4是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法另一流程示意图。由图4可知，该方法还包括以下步骤：
S150，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息。
在一些可行的实现方式中，当终端设备确定需要激活或者恢复(在本申请中，激活和恢复可相互替换使用，下文将以激活进行统一描述)双连接时，可向第一网络设备发送第三消息。这里，上述第三消息用于向第二网络设备指示或者请求进行双连接的激活。
需要说明的是，实际应用中，在终端设备为双卡设备的场景下，若终端设备确定其副卡发起的如IMS注册或者SMS业务等业务执行完成，则可确定需要进行双连接的激活。或者，当终端设备确定副卡上执行的业务所对应的时长等于或者大于预设的时长上限时，也可确定需要激活双连接。或者，在终端设备为单卡设备的场景下，当终端设备根据其当前的业务量和网络负载等信息确定需要使用双连接时，也可确定进行双连接的激活。可以理解到的是，终端设备确定需要进行双连接激活的前提条件并不仅限于上述三种，也可存在其他的前提条件，本申请不做具体限制。
在一种可选的实现方式中，第三消息主要用于提醒或者提示第一网络设备终端设备需要进行双连接的激活。即终端设备仅是通过上述第三消息去通知第一网络设备其已开始或者即将开始进行双连接的激活，并且不需要第一网络设备进一步确认其是否可以进行双连接的激活。这样可简化终端设备去激活双连接的过程，提升双连接的去激活效率。
在另一种可选的实现方式中，第三消息主要用于终端设备请求第一网络设备确认其是否可以进行双连接的激活。具体实现中，第一网络设备在接收到终端设备发送的第三消息后，可根据终端设备的业务状态、网络状态等信息判定终端设备是否可以进行双连接的激活。或者，第一网络设备也可根据上述第二辅助信息中包括的触发业务的时长信息等确定终端设备是否可以激活双连接。若第一网络设备确定终端设备可以进行双连接的去激活，则可向终端设备发送第四消息以指示终端设备进行双连接的激活。若第一网络设备确定终端设备不可以进行双连接的激活，则可向终端设备发送一个否定信息以指示终端设备其不可进行双连接的激活。这里，需要说明的是，终端设备也可将直接或者通过第一网络设备间接的将上述第三消息发送给第二网络设备。第二网络设备可采用和第一网络设备相同的方法确定并告知终端设备其是否可以激活双连接。在下文中，将以第一网络设备接收第三消息并反馈第四消具体场景进行描述。
具体实现中，在第一网络设备在确定出上述第四消息后，可通过媒体接入控制元素(MAC CE)或者PDCCH信令等载体发送上述第四消息。这里，上述第四消息可以为包含有多个指示比特的去激活MAC CE。这个去激活MAC CE中包含的每个指示比特与终端设备的辅小区组中每个辅小区一一对应。一个指示比特用于指示一个辅小区是否需要去激活。例如，假设指示比特B2对应辅小区cell2。当指示比特B2的值为1时，可表征辅小区cell2需要被激活。
当然，可以理解到的是，终端设备也可直接从第一网络设备或者第二网络设备出接收上述第四消息。即第一网络设备和第二网络设备可直接发送上述第四消息，而不是在接收到上述第三消息之后才发送上述第四消息。
S160，终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一些可行的实现方式中，终端设备在发送完上述第三消息或者接收到第一网络设备发发送的第四消息后，可激活或者恢复双连接。具体来说，就是终端设备可继续保持其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并且恢复其与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，终端设备可继续保持其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
下面将结合前文叙述的去激活过程，对本申请实施例提供的多种激活方法进行简单的描述。
激活方法一：
对应去激活方法一所述的方法，终端设备在确定需要激活双连接之后，可恢复通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间进行的通信。具体的，就是终端设备激活或者恢复通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接。或者，终端设备可恢复通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间建立的无线链路。
这里，终端设备在进行双连接的激活过程中无需重新配置其与第二网络设备之间的无线连接所对应的通信资源，可简化双连接的激活过程，提升双连接的激活效率。
在另一种可选的实现中，终端设备在确定需要激活双连接之后，可从辅小区组中确定出N4个第二辅小区。这里，上述第二辅小区为处于去激活的状态的辅小区。或者说，为终端设备和第二网络设备之间并未使用的辅小区。这里需要说明的是，上述N4个第二辅小区和上述N2个第一辅小区不相同。例如，假设在去激活双连接之前，上述辅小区组中包括Scell1、Scell2、Scell3、Scell4和Scell5共五个辅小区，其中，终端设备通过Scell3、Scell4和Scell5与第二网络设备通信(即Scell3、Scell4和Scell5处于激活的状态，Scell3、Scell4和Scell5属于第一辅小区)，Scell1、Scell2并未被使用(即Scell1、Scell2处于去激活的状态)。在去激活过程中，终端设备可暂停通过Scell3、Scell4和Scell5与第二网络设备之间的通信。而在激活的过程中，终端设备可从上述Scell1、Scell2、Scell3、Scell4和Scell5中选择出Scell1、Scell2、Scell3作为第二辅小区并进行激活。直白的来说，就是终端设备在激活双连接的过程中恢复通信的一个或者多个辅小区可以和终端设备在去激活过程中暂停通信的一个或者多个辅小区不相同。
激活方法二：
对应去激活方法二所述方法，在一种实现方式中，假设上述第一无线承载为SCG承载。终端设备在确定需要进行双连接的激活之后，可直接恢复终端设备与第二网络设备之间基于SCG承载所进行的通信。需要说明的是，由于去激活双连接时终端设备仅暂停或者停止基于SCG承载所进行的通信，并未释放终端设备与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接或者无线链路所对应的通信资源，也并未删除上述SCG承载，所以在激活过程中，终端设备就无需新建新的无线承载，提升了双连接的激效率。
在另一种可行的实现方式中，假设上述第一无线承载为split承载。终端设备在确定需 要激活双连接之后，可恢复终端设备与第二网络设备之间基于split承载所进行的通信。具体的来说，就是终端设备可恢复与第二网络设备之间基于split承载中的SCG侧的承载所实现的通信。进一步的，在恢复split承载上的通信的同时，终端设备还可将split承载的主通道(primary path)由上述主小区组MCG恢复成第一小区组。或者，终端设备也可将split承载对应的上行数据分离阈值(ul-data split threshold)由上述第二阈值。这里，上述第二阈值修改成第三阈值。这里，上述第三阈值小于上述第二阈值，上述第三阈值可以等于上述第一阈值，也可以不等于上述第一阈值。
进一步的，若终端设备在暂停或者停止通过SCG承载或者split承载与第二网络设备进行的通信时还保存了SCG承载或者split承载所对应的数据传输状态信息或者配置信息，则终端设备可根据上述数据传输状态信息或者配置信息恢复与第二网络设备之间基于SCG承载或者split承载所进行的通信。
由于去激活过程中终端设备仅是暂停了通过SCG承载或者split承载所进行通信，但SCG承载或者split承载并未被删除，因此，在进行双连接的激活时，终端设备可继续采用上述SCG承载或者split承载，而无需重新配置新的无线承载，从而提升了双连接的去激活和激活效率。
激活方法三：
在本方法中，上述第四消息包括第二链路指示信息，该第二链路指示信息用于指示终端设备和第二网络设备之间将要被恢复通信的第二链路是上行链路还是下行链路。结合前文激活方法一的内容，终端设备在确定需要激活双连接之后，可从上述第四消息中确定出上述第二链路指示信息，并根据上述第二链路指示信息确定上述第二链路。然后，终端设备可恢复通过上述N2个第一辅小区与第二网络设备之间在第二链路上的通信。具体过程可参见上述激活方法一中描述的恢复通信的过程，此处便不再赘述。这里，需要说明的是，上述第二链路和前文所述的第一链路可以相同，也可以不同。例如，假设初始情况为终端设备通过Scell1和SCell2与第二网络设备进行下行通信，此时上行通信被暂停。在去激活过程中，终端设备可将其与第二网络设备之间通过SCell1和SCell2进行的下行通信暂停，而在激活过程中，终端设备可将其与第二网络设备之间通过SCell1和SCell2进行的上行通信恢复，而下行通信仍然处于暂停或者停止的状态。
激活方法四：
在本方法中，终端设备可以激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行的上行通信或者下行通信。结合去激活方法三中的内容，终端设备在确定需要进行双连接的激活时，可从上述第四消息中提取出第二链路指示信息，并根据上述第二链路指示信息确定出将要被恢复通信的链路是上行链路还是下行链路。下面，假设上述第二链路指示信息指示的是上行链路。终端设备在确定出将要被恢复的链路是上行链路后，在第一无线承载为SCG承载这一场景下，终端设备可恢复通过SCG承载与第二网络设备在上行链路上进行的上行通信。在第一无线承载为split承载这一场景下，终端设备可恢复通过split承载与第二网络设备在上行链路上进行的上行通信。具体过程可参见上述激活方法二中所描述的恢复SCG承载或者split承载上的通信的过程，此处便不再赘述。同理，这里的第二链路可以与上述第一链路相同，也可与上述第一链路不同。
激活方法五：
对应去激活方法五，在去激活方法五中，终端设备在进行双连接的去激活之前，可根据第五消息确定出上述第二无线承载。然后，在去激活双连接的过程中，第一无线承载上被暂停的通信业务将由上述第二无线承载代替进行。因此，当终端设备确定激活双连接时，终端设备可暂停或者停止与第二网络设备之间基于第二无线承载进行的通信业务，并保存第二无线承载所对应的数据传输状态信息。然后，终端设备可根据第二无线承载所对应数据传输状态信息，在第一无线承载上继续执行上述通信业务。
激活方法六：
对应去激活方法六，在去激活双连接的过程中，终端设备暂停或者停止通过上述第一无线承载在第一链路上的通信业务，并将该第一链路上的通信业务转移到第二无线承载上执行。当终端设备确定进行双连接的激活时，终端设备可将第二无线承载在第一链路上传输的通信业务恢复到第一无线承载上执行。具体过程可一并参见激活方法五中描述的激活双连接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
总的来说，就是终端设备在收到双连接的激活的指示后，可执行如下操作中的至少一种：
(1)恢复SCG承载上的数据传输。或者，恢复分离承载的传输，即恢复主通道的配置为去激活之前的配置，恢复上行数据分离阈值为去激活前的配置。
(2)将属于SCG的那些之前被去激活的辅小区的状态修改为激活状态。
并且，如果上述去激活的指示中指示了终端设备仅激活下行方向的双连接的传输，或者，仅激活上行方向的双连接的传输，或者，激活上行和下行方向的双连接的传输，则相应地，终端设备可根据该指示仅激活下行方向的双连接的传输，或者，仅激活上行方向的双连接的传输或者激活上行和下行方向的双连接的传输。
S170，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第七消息。
在一些可行的实现方式中，上述第一网络设备还可向上述第二网络设备发送第七消息，以指示第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第七消息具体过程参加前文叙述的第一网络设备向终端设备发送第四消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。比如，上述第七消息可以为包含有多个指示比特的去激活MAC CE。所述MAC CE的定义可以参考步骤S110中所述的内容。
S180，第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。
第二网络设备在接收到上述第七消息后，可激活或者恢复双连接。这里，可以理解到的是，由于激活或者恢复双连接的操作主要是针对终端设备和第二网络设备之间的无线承载或者通信链路的操作，因此，对终端设备和第二网络设备而言，二者激活的过程是相同的。换一句话说，就是第二网络设备也可执行终端设备执行的激活双连接操作。所以，第二网络设备激活双连接的过程具体可参见前文激活方法一、激活方法二、激活方法三、激活方法四、激活方法五以及激活方法六中所描述去激活双连接的过程(这里，方法的实现对象由终端设备变成了第二网络设备)，此处不再赘述。
需要说明的是，在本申请实施例中，上述第一网络设备指代的是主网络设备(或者主基站)，上述第二网络设备指代的是辅网络设备(或者辅基站)。而在另一些不同的场景中， 上述第一网络设备也可是辅基站，上述第二网络设备也可是主基站，本申请不做具体限制。另外，终端设备在发送上述第一消息、第三消息等信息时，也可以是直接或者间接的发送给第二网络设备，并接受第二网络设备发送的反馈信息，本申请也不做具体限制。
在本申请实施例中终端设备可主动向第一网络设备请求或者指示其需要进行双连接的去激活或者激活，并且在去激活过程中不会释放与第二网络设备之间建立的RRC连接或者无线链路，可保证其能够更加快速的进行双连接的激活，可提升双连接的激活或者去激活的效率，从而提升双连接技术的适用性和实用性。
实施例二
请参见图5，图5是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图。该双连接管理方法适用于上述图1所示的无线通信系统。由图5可知，该方法包括以下步骤：
S210，确定第一无线承载。
在一些可行的实施方式中，终端设备可根据其系统信息确定出其与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。这里，上述第一无线承载包括SCG承载或者split承载，本申请不做具体限制。
S220，确定与上述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
在一些可行的实施方式中，终端设备在确定出上述第一无线承载之后，可继续确定出与上述第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载。这里，上述第二无线承载为终端设备与第一网络设备中的无线承载。上述第二无线承载用于传输被暂停或停止的第一通信业务，这个第一通信业务指的是终端设备与第二网络设备通过上述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。例如，具体实现中，假设上述第一无线承载为无线承载A。终端设备进行双连接的去激活之前，可从终端设备和第一网络设备之间已经建立好的MCG承载中挑选出一个MCG承载(优选的，该MCG承载并未被使用)，并将该MCG承载确定为与上述第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载。或者，终端设备也可接收由第一网络设备发送的第五消息。这里，上述第五消息用于指示与终端设备和第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载相关联的第二无线承载，上述第五消息中可包括无线承载配置信息。然后，终端设备可根据上述第五消息中包含的无线承载配置信息新建一个MCG承载，并将该新建的MCG承载确定为上述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。这里，需要说明的是，上述已经建立的MCG承载或者新建的MCG承载可为单独的MCG承载，也可为辅节点终结分离承载中的MCG承载(即SN terminated Split Beare中的MCG侧的承载)，此处不做具体限制。后续去激活过程中，上述第二无线承载用于替换终端设备与第二网络设备之间被停用的第一无线承载，从而保证终端设备与第二网络设备之间的通信业务的连续性。
请一并参见图6，图6是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图。由图6可知，该方法还包括：
S230，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息。
在一些可行的实施方式中，当终端设备确定需要去激活双连接时，其可确定出第一消息，并将该第一消息发送给第一网络设备。这里，上述第一消息用于指示或者请求进行双连接的去激活或者挂起。这里，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第一消息的过程具体可参见实施例一中步骤S110中所描述的向第一网络设备发送第一消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。
S240，终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
在一些可行的实施方式中，终端设备在发送完上述第一消息或者接收到第一网络设备发发送的第二消息后，可去激活或者挂起双连接。具体来说，就是终端设备在进行双连接的去激活之后，其与第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接会继续保持，而其与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接则会被去激活或者挂起。或者，终端设备在进行双连接的去激活之后，其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接会继续保持，其与第二网络设备之间的无线链路会被断开。
具体实现中，在第一无线承载有关联的第二无线承载的前提下，终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接的过程可参见上述实施例一中步骤S120中所描述的去激活方法五或者去激活方法六所涉及的去激活双链接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
请一并参见图7，图7是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图。由图7可知，该方法还包括：
S250，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第六消息。
在一些可行的实施方式中，第一网络设备在接收到上述第一消息并确定终端设备可去激活双连接之后，其可向第二网络设备发送第六消息。该第六消息用于指示第二终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。具体实现中，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第六消息的过程可参见实施例一中步骤S130中描述的第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第六消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。
S260，所述第二网络设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
在一些可行的实现方式中，第二网络设备在接收到第六消息后，可去激活或者挂起双连接。这里，可以理解到的是，由于去激活或者挂起双连接的操作主要是针对终端设备和第二网络设备之间的无线承载或者通信链路的操作，因此，针对终端设备和第二网络设备而言，二者去激活的过程是相同的。在第一无线承载存在关联的第二无线承载的前提下，第二网络设备去激活双连接的过程具体可参见实施例一中步骤S120中所描述的去激活方法五或者去激活方法六所涉及的去激活双链接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
请一并参见图8，图8是本申请实施例提供的一种双连接管理方法又一流程示意图。由图8可知，该方法还包括：
S270，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息。
在一些可行的实施方式中，当终端设备确定需要激活或者恢复双连接时，可向第一网络设备发送第三消息。这里，第三消息用于向第二网络设备指示或者请求进行双连接的激活。具体实现中，终端设备向第一网络设备发送第三消息的过程可参见实施例一中步骤S150中描述的向第一网络设备发送第三消息的过程，此次便不再赘述。
S280，终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一些可行的实施方式中，终端设备在发送完第三消息或者接收到第一网络设备发发送的第四消息后，可激活或者恢复双连接。具体来说，就是终端设备可继续保持其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并且恢复其与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，终端设备可继续保持其与第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
具体实现中，在第一无线承载存在关联的第二无线承载的前提下，终端设备激活或者恢复双连接的过程具体可参见上述实施例一中步骤S160中的激活方法五和激活方法六所描述的激活或者恢复双连接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
S290，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第七消息。
在一些可行的实现方式中，第一网络设备还可向第二网络设备发送第七消息，以指示第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。具体实现中，第一网络设备向第二网络设备发送第七消息的过程可参见实施例一中步骤S170中所描述的第一网络设备向终端设备发送第七消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。
S300，第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一些可行的实现方式中，在一些可行的实现方式中，第二网络设备在接收到第七消息后，可激活或者恢复双连接。这里，可以理解到的是，由于激活或者恢复双连接的操作主要是针对终端设备和第二网络设备之间的无线承载或者通信链路的操作，因此，对终端设备和第二网络设备而言，二者激活的过程是相同的。因此，具体实现中，第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接的过程具体可参见上述实施例一中步骤S160中的激活方法五和激活方法六所描述的激活或者恢复双连接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中，预先为终端设备和第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载配置了关联的第二无线承载。使得第一无线承载上因去激活双连接所暂停或者停止通信业务得以在第二无线承载上继续执行，从而避免去激活双连接所造成的通信业务的终端给终端设备带来的影响，保证了双连接的业务连续性，提升了双连接技术的实用性和适用性。
请参见图9，图9是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置一结构示意图。该通信装置可用于执行上述实施例一中终端设备的功能。该通信装置可以就是终端设备本身，也可以是终端设备内部的元件或者模块。为了便于说明，图9中仅示出了通信装置的主要部件。由图9可知，该通信装置包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对装置进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收使用该装置的用户输入的数据以及对该用户输出数据。需要说明的是，在某些场景下，该通信设备可以不包括输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到装置时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图9中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的装置产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
作为一种可选的实现方式，处理器可以包括基带处理器和/或中央处理器，基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器主要用于对整个装置进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。图9中的处理器可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器 的功能，本领域技术人员可以理解，基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器，通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解，装置可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式，装置可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力，装置的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。上述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。上述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中，也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中，由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为装置的收发单元，将具有处理功能的处理器视为装置的处理单元。如图9所示，该通信装置包括收发单元91和处理单元92。可选的，可以将收发单元91中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元91中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元91包括接收单元和发送单元。这里，接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
可以理解的是，上述收发单元91和处理单元92共同用于执行上述实施例一中终端设备所执行的多个过程或者步骤。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于根据第二消息去激活或挂起双连接。所述第二消息来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备。
在一种可行的实现方式中，上述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活第一辅小区集合。或者上述指示信息用于指示挂起与第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
在一种可行的实现方式中，处理单元92保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，处理单元92保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，处理单元92暂停或停止通过与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载的通信。或者，处理单元92将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道设置为主小区组MCG，和/或，处理单元92将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分离阈值由第一阈值修改成为第二阈值。这里，所述第二阈值大于第一阈值。或者，处理单元92暂停与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM，其中，所述第一辅小区为与所述第二网络设备进行通信的辅小区。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92保存所述第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息。或者，所述处理单元92保存所述第一无线承载的配置信息。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述处理单元92确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。这里，所述第二无线承载为与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述处理单元92根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92暂停或停止通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备之间的通信。所述收发单元91通过所述第二无线承载传输与所述第一无线承载上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92暂停或停止与所述第一辅小区在第一链路上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于向所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括以下至少一个：请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级、双连接中断时长。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级包括SCG承载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于接收所述第一网络设备或第二网络设备发送的第三辅助信息。所述处理单元92用于根据所述第三辅助信息进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备根据所述多个优先级信息、所述一个或者多个无线承载类型信息和所述一个或者多个无线承载的标识信息中的任一项确定。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于向所述第一网络设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发业务的业务类型，所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者。所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于向所述第一网络设备发送第三消息。所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息。所述处理单元92根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于恢复通过与第二网络设备之间的第一 无线承载的通信。或者，所述处理单元92用于将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道由MCG恢复为第一小区组，和/或，将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分裂阈值由第二阈值修改成第三阈值。这里，所述第三阈值小于所述第二阈值，所述第一小区组为最近一次去激活或者挂起双连接时所述主通道对应的小区组。或者，所述处理单元92用于恢复与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述处理单元92用于根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于暂停通过第二无线承载与第一网络设备的通信，所述第二无线承载与终端设备与第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载相关联，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第一网络设备之间的无线承载。所述处理单元92用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于激活或者恢复与所述第一辅小区之间在第二链路上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
具体实现中，所述收发单元91用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息的过程。具体过程可参见实施例一中步骤S110中所描述的向第一网络设备发送第一消息的过程，此处便不再赘述。所述处理单元92用于去激活或挂起双连接，具体过程可参见实施例一中步骤S120中所描述的去激活或者挂起双连接的过程，此处便不再赘述。
请参见图10，图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。如图10所示，该通信装置可应用于如图1所示的通信系统中，执行上述实施例一中第一网络设备的功能。该通信装置可以就是第一网络设备本身，也可以是第一网络设备内部的元件或者模块。该通信装置可包括一个或多个收发单元101和一个或多个处理单元102。上述收发单元101可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线和射频单元。上述收发单元101部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中的指示信息。上述处理单元102部分主要用于进行基带处理，对装置进行控制等。上述收发单元101与处理单元102可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式装置。例如上述处理单元102可以用于控制装置执行上述实施例一中关于指示信息的确定过程。在具体实现中，上述处理单元102可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如NR网)，也可以 分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。上述处理单元102还包括存储器和处理器，上述存储器用于存储必要的指令和数据。上述处理器用于控制装置进行必要的动作，例如用于控制装置执行上述方法实施例中关于装置的操作流程。上述存储器和处理器可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
可以理解到的是，上述收发单元101和处理单元102共同用于执行上述实施例一中第一网络设备执行的双连接管理方法的步骤或者过程。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被暂停通过第一无线承载进行通信的第一链路。或者，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被暂停通信的第一链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于接收第二辅助信息。所述第二辅助信息中包括以下至少一个：去激活或者挂起的原因、去激活或者挂起的时长、触发业务的业务类型、所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务、所述触发业务的业务时长。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101还用于向所述终端设备发送第三辅助信息，所述第三辅助信息进行用于所述终端设备进行所述双连接模式的无线承载配置，其中，所述第三辅助信息由所述处理单元102根据所述请求配置的承载类型、优选配置的承载类型、不同承载的配置优先级、不同承载类型的配置优先级中的任一项确定。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述不同承载的配置优先级中包括SCG承载、MCG承载和split承载对应的第一配置优先级、第二配置优先级和第三配置优先级，所述第三配置优先级最高。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于向所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备发送第五消息，其中，所述第五消息用于所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备确定与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载为所述终端设备与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于接收终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。所述收发单元101还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，其中，所述第四消息用于终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
结合第八方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被激活或者恢复的通过第一无线承载进行通信的第二链路，或者，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与第一辅小区之间将要被激活或者恢复通信的第二链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路包括上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于向所述第二网络设备发送第六消息，其中，所述第六消息用于所述第二网络设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101还用于向所述第二网络设备发送第七消息，其中，所述第七消息用于所述第二网络设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
请参见图11，图11是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。如图11所示，该通信装置可应用于如图1所示的通信系统中，执行上述实施例一中第二网络设备的功能。该通信装置可以就是第二网络设备本身，也可以是第二网络设备内部的元件或者模块。该装置可包括一个或多个收发单元111和一个或多个处理单元112。上述收发单元111可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线和射频单元。上述收发单元111部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中的指示信息。上述处理单元112部分主要用于进行基带处理，对装置进行控制等。上述收发单元111与处理单元112可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式装置。例如上述处理单元112可以用于控制装置执行上述实施例一中关于指示信息的确定过程。在具体实现中，上述处理单元112可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如NR网)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。上述处理单元112还包括存储器和处理器，上述存储器用于存储必要的指令和数据。上述处理器用于控制装置进行必要的动作，例如用于控制装置执行上述方法实施例中关于装置的操作流程。上述存储器和处理器可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
可以理解到的是，上述收发单元111和上述处理单元112可用于执行上述实施例一的第一网络设备所执行的双连接管理方法的步骤或者进程。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于去激活或者挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接。或者，所述处理单元112用于断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载。所述处理单元112还还用于确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。其中，所述第二无线承载为所述第二网络设备与第一无线网络之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输所述终端设备和所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站，或者，所述第一网络设备为辅基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
请一并参见图9，上述收发单元91和处理单元9还可用于执行上述实施例二中终端设备所执行的双连接管理方法的过程或者步骤。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于接收所述第一网络设备发送的第五消息。所述处理单元92用于根据所述第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述处理单元92用于去激活或 挂起双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第二消息。所述处理单元92用于根据所述第二消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接。或者，所述处理单元92用于保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于暂停或者停止通过第一无线承载与第二网络设备之间的目标通信业务。所述收发单元91用于通过所述第二无线承载传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于暂停通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第一链路上的目标通信业务。所述收发单元91用于通过所述第二无线承载在所述第一链路上传输被暂停或停止的目标通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息中包括第一链路指示信息，所述第一链路指示信息用于指示所述第一链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一无线承载为SCG承载或者split承载。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一网络设备为主基站，所述第二网络设备为辅基站。或者，所述第一网络设备为辅助基站，所述第二网络设备为主基站。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于向第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复。所述处理单元92用于激活或者恢复双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元91用于接收来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备的第四消息。所述处理单元92用于根据所述第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于激活或恢复与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于恢复通过所述第一无线承载传输与第二网络设备之间的通信业务。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于根据保存的第一无线承载的数据传输 状态信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。或者，所述处理单元92用于根据保存的第一无线承载的配置信息激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述第二网络设备的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元92用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备在第二链路上的通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二链路为上行链路或下行链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息中包括第二链路指示信息，所述第二链路指示信息用于指示所述第二链路。
请一并参见图10，上述收发单元101和处理单元102还可用于执行上述实施例二中第一网络设备所执行的双连接管理方法的过程或者步骤。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于接收所述终端设备发送的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起。所述收发单元101还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第一消息的第二消息，所述第二消息用于所述终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
结合第十一方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元101用于接收所述终端设备发送的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复。所述收发单元101还用于向所述终端设备发送响应所述第三消息的第四消息，所述第四消息用于所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第二消息包括第一链路指示信息，该第一链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间通过第一无线承载进行通信时将要被暂停第一链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第四消息包括第二链路指示信息，该第二链路指示信息用于指示所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间将要被恢复通信的第二链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第一链路为上行链路或下行链路，所述第二链路为上行链路或者下行链路。
请一并参见图11，上述收发单元111和处理单元112还可用于执行上述实施例二中第二网络设备所执行的双连接管理方法的过程或者步骤。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元111用于接收来自所述第一网络设备的第六消息。所述处理单元112用于根据所述第六消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起，或者，根据所述第七消息进行双连接模式的激活或者恢复。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述第六消息包括：指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活所述第一辅小区集合，或者，挂起与所述第一辅小区集合之间的连接。所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
结合第十二方面，在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于去激活或挂起与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，断开与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于暂停通过所述第一无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述收发单元111用于通过所述第二无线承载与所述终端设备进行通信。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述收发单元111用于获取第一网络设备发送的第七消息。所述处理单元112用于根据所述第七消息激活或者恢复双连接。
一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于激活或者恢复与所述终端设备之间的RRC连接；或者，恢复与所述终端设备之间的无线链路。
在一种可行的实现方式中，所述处理单元112用于暂停通过所述第二无线承载与终端设备的通信。所述处理单元112用于激活或者恢复通过所述第一无线承载与所述终端设备的通信。
请参见图12，图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。该通信装置可以是实施例一中的终端设备，可用于实现上述实施例一中终端设备所实现的双连接管理方法。该通信装置包括：处理器121、存储器122、收发器123和总线系统124。
存储器121包括但不限于是RAM、ROM、EPROM或CD-ROM，该存储器121用于存储相关指令及数据。存储器121存储了如下的元素，可执行模块或者数据结构，或者它们的子集，或者它们的扩展集：
操作指令：包括各种操作指令，用于实现各种操作。
操作系统：包括各种系统程序，用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于硬件的任务。
图12中仅示出了一个存储器，当然，存储器也可以根据需要，设置为多个。
收发器123可以是通信模块、收发电路。应用在本申请实施例中，收发器123用于执行实施例一中所涉及的第一消息或者第二消息的发送或者接收的过程。
处理器121可以是控制器，CPU，通用处理器，DSP，ASIC，FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请实施例一公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。如实施例一中所涉及的双连接的去激活或者激活的过程。处理器121也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。
具体的应用中，装置的各个组件通过总线系统124耦合在一起，其中总线系统124除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图12中将各种总线都标为总线系统124。为便于表示，图12中仅是示意性画出。
应注意，实际应用中，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal Processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only  memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本申请实施例描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是实施例一中的终端设备。该通信装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例一中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述终端设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
请参见图13，图13是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。该通信装置可以是实施例一中的第一网络设备，可用于实现上述实施例一中第一网络设备所实现的双连接管理方法。该装置包括：处理器131、存储器132、收发器133和总线系统134。
存储器131包括但不限于是RAM、ROM、EPROM或CD-ROM，该存储器131用于存储相关指令及数据。存储器131存储了如下的元素，可执行模块或者数据结构，或者它们的子集，或者它们的扩展集：
操作指令：包括各种操作指令，用于实现各种操作。
操作系统：包括各种系统程序，用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于硬件的任务。
图13中仅示出了一个存储器，当然，存储器也可以根据需要，设置为多个。
收发器133可以是通信模块、收发电路。应用在本申请实施例中，收发器133用于执行实施例一中所涉及的第二消息或者第五消息的发送过程。
处理器131可以是控制器，CPU，通用处理器，DSP，ASIC，FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请实施例一公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。处理器131也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。
具体的应用中，装置的各个组件通过总线系统134耦合在一起，其中总线系统134除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图13中将各种总线都标为总线系统134。为便于表示，图13中仅是示意性画 出。
应注意，实际应用中，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal Processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本申请实施例描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种装置，该装置可以是实施例一中的第一网络设备。该装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例一中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述第一网络设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
请参见图14，图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置又一结构示意图。该通信装置可以是实施例一中的第二网络设备，可用于实现上述实施例一中第二网络设备所实现的双连接管理方法。该装置包括：处理器141、存储器142、收发器143和总线系统144。
存储器141包括但不限于是RAM、ROM、EPROM或CD-ROM，该存储器141用于存储相关指令及数据。存储器141存储了如下的元素，可执行模块或者数据结构，或者它们的子集，或者它们的扩展集：
操作指令：包括各种操作指令，用于实现各种操作。
操作系统：包括各种系统程序，用于实现各种基础业务以及处理基于硬件的任务。
图14中仅示出了一个存储器，当然，存储器也可以根据需要，设置为多个。
收发器143可以是通信模块、收发电路。应用在本申请实施例中，收发器143用于执行实施例一中所涉及的指示信息的发送过程。
处理器141可以是控制器，CPU，通用处理器，DSP，ASIC，FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请实施例公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。处理器141也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，DSP和微处理器的组合等等。
具体的应用中，装置的各个组件通过总线系统144耦合在一起，其中总线系统144除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图14中将各种总线都标为总线系统144。为便于表示，图14中仅是示意性画出。
应注意，实际应用中，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal Processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本申请实施例描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例一中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种装置，该装置可以是实施例一中的网络设备。该装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例一中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述网络设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时， 该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
请一并参见图12，该通信装置还可以是实施例二中的终端设备，可用于实现上述实施例二中终端设备所实现的双连接管理方法。具体过程可参见前文所述，此处便不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是实施例二中的终端设备。该通信装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例二中终端设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述终端设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
请一并参见图13，该通信装置还可以是是实施例二中的第一网络设备，可用于实现上述实施例二中第一网络设备所实现的双连接管理方法。具体内容请参见前文，此处便不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种装置，该装置可以是实施例二中的第一网络设备。该装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例二中第一网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述第一网络设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
请一并参见图14，该通信装置还可以是是实施例二中的第二网络设备，可用于实现上述实施例二中第二网络设备所实现的双连接管理方法。具体内容请参见上文，此处便不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述实施例二中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。
本申请实施例还提供了一种装置，该装置可以是实施例二中的网络设备。该装置包括处理器和接口。该处理器用于执行上述实施例二中第二网络设备执行的方法或者步骤。应理解，上述网络设备可以是一个芯片，上述处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等。当通过软件来实现时， 该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，改存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于上述处理器之外，独立存在。
在上述方法实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。上述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行上述计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例上述的流程或功能。上述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。上述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，上述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber Line，DSL)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。上述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。上述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD)等。
应理解，本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”常可被互换使用。本实施例中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、计算机软件或者二者的结合来实现，为了清楚地说明硬件和软件的可互换性，在上述说明中已经按照功能一般性地描述了各示例的组成及步骤。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
在本申请所提供的实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置仅仅是示意性的，例如，单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另外，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，也可以是电的，机械的或其它的形式连接。
另外，在本申请实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
总之，以上上述仅为本申请技术方案的较佳实施例而已，并非用于限定本申请的保护范围。凡在本申请的精神和原则之内，所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等，均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。

Claims (34)

  1. 一种双连接管理方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于终端设备，所述终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备以双连接通信，所述方法包括：
    向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起；
    去激活或挂起双连接。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或挂起双连接包括：
    根据第二消息去激活或挂起双连接，所述第二消息来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息包括：
    指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示去激活第一辅小区集合，或者，所述指示信息用于指示挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接，所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或挂起双连接包括：
    保持与所述第一网络设备之间的无线资源控制RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，
    保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或挂起双连接包括以下至少一项：
    暂停或停止第一无线承载的通信，所述第一无线承载为与所述第二网络设备之间的无线承载；
    将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道设置为主小区组MCG，和/或，将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分离阈值由第一阈值修改成为第二阈值，其中，所述第二阈值大于第一阈值；
    暂停与第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM，其中，所述第一辅小区为与所述第二网络设备进行通信的辅小区。
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括:
    向所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备发送第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括以下至少一个：
    请求配置的承载类型；
    优选配置的承载类型；
    不同承载的配置优先级；
    不同承载类型的配置优先级；
    双连接中断时长。
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一网络设备发送第二辅助信息，所述第二辅助信息包括以下至少一个：
    去激活或者挂起的原因；
    去激活或者挂起的时长；
    触发业务的业务类型，所述触发业务为触发去激活或者挂起双连接的通信业务；
    所述触发业务的业务时长。
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起辅小区组SCG，或者，所述去激活或挂起双连接为去激活或挂起第二网络设备。
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括:
    向第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或者恢复；
    激活或者恢复双连接。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或者恢复双连接包括：
    根据第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复，所述第四消息来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备。
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或恢复双连接包括：
    激活或恢复与所述第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，
    恢复与所述第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
  12. 根据权利要求9-11任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或者恢复双连接包括以下至少一个：
    恢复所述第一无线承载的通信；
    将所述第一无线承载对应的主通道由所述MCG恢复为第一小区组，和/或，将所述第一无线承载对应的上行数据分裂阈值由第二阈值修改成第三阈值，其中，所述第三阈值小于所述第二阈值，所述第一小区组为最近一次去激活或者挂起双连接时所述主通道对应的小区组；
    恢复与所述第一辅小区之间的通信，并保持对所述第一辅小区中的主辅小区的无线链路监测RLM。
  13. 根据权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复SCG，或者，所述激活或恢复双连接为激活或恢复第二网络设备。
  14. 一种双连接管理方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于第一网络设备，所述第一网络设备与第二网络设备和终端设备以双连接通信，所述方法包括：
    接收来自所述终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起；
    向所述终端设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息用于指示终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息包括：
    指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示所述终端设备去激活第一辅小区集合，或者，所述指示信息用于指示所述终端设备挂起与所述第一辅小区集合的连接，所述第一辅小区集合中包括主辅小区和/或除所述主辅小区以外的一个或者多个辅小区。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括:
    接收所述终端设备发送的第一辅助信息，所述第一辅助信息包括以下至少一个：
    请求配置的承载类型；
    优选配置的承载类型；
    配置不同承载的优先级；
    配置不同承载类型的优先级；
    双连接中断时长。
  17. 根据权利要求14-16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    接收来自所述终端设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复；
    向所述终端设备发送第四消息，所述第四消息用于指示所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
  18. 一种双连接管理方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于终端设备，所述终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备以双连接通信，所述方法包括：
    确定与所述第二网络设备之间的第一无线承载；
    确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，其中，所述第二无线承载为与第一网络设备之间的承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输被暂停或停止的第一通信业务，所述第一通信业务为与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
  19. 根据权利18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定与所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载包括：
    根据第五消息确定所述第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载，所述第五消息来自所述第一网络设备或所述第二网络设备。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一网络设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起；
    去激活或挂起双连接。
  21. 根据权利要求18-20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或挂起双连接包括：
    根据第二消息进行双连接的去激活或挂起，其中，所述第二消息来自所述第一网络设备或者所述第二网络设备。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述去激活或者挂起双连接包括：
    保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并去激活或挂起与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，
    保持与所述第一网络设备之间的RRC连接，并断开与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
  23. 根据权利要求18-22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向第一网络设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或挂起，
    激活或挂起所述双连接。
  24. 根据权利要求18-23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或者恢复双连接包括：
    根据第四消息进行双连接的激活或恢复，其中，所述第四消息来自所述第一网络设备或者第二网络设备。
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或者恢复双连接包括：
    暂停或停止通过第二无线承载与第一网络设备的通信，所述第二无线承载与第一无线承载相关联，所述第二无线承载为和所述第一网络设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输与所述第二网络设备之间被暂停或停止的目标通信业务，所述目标通信业务为与所述第二网络设备之间通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务；或者
    恢复通过所述第一无线承载与第二网络设备的通信。
  26. 一种双连接管理方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于第一网络设备，所述终端设备与第一网络设备和第二网络设备以双连接通信，所述方法包括：
    确定第五消息，所述第五消息用于指示与第一无线承载关联的第二无线承载；
    向所述终端设备和/或第二网络设备发送所述第五消息；
    其中，所述第二无线承载为与所述终端设备之间的无线承载，所述第一无线承载为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备之间的无线承载，所述第二无线承载用于传输被暂停或停止的第一通信业务，所述第一通信业务为所述终端设备与所述第二网络设备通过所述第一无线承载进行的通信业务。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的去激活或挂起；
    向所述终端设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息指示用于所述终端设备去激活或者挂起双连接。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述终端设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于指示或请求进行双连接的激活或恢复；
    向所述终端设备发送第四消息，所述第四消息用于所述终端设备激活或者恢复双连接。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法，其特征在于，所述激活或者恢复双连接包括：
    激活或恢复所述终端设备与第二网络设备之间的RRC连接；或者，
    恢复所述终端设备与第二网络设备之间的无线链路。
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令或程序，当所述计算机指令或程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法，或者实现如权利要求14-17任一项所述的方法，或者实现如权利要求18-25任一项所述的方法，或者实现如权利要求26-29任一项所述的方法。
  31. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求1-13中的任一项所述的方法。
  32. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求18-25中的任一项所述的方法。
  33. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求14-17中的任一项所述的方法。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求26-29中的任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/112296 2019-09-27 2020-08-29 一种双连接管理方法和通信装置 Ceased WO2021057389A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP20868096.7A EP4027746B1 (en) 2019-09-27 2020-08-29 Dual connectivity management method and communication apparatus
US17/704,538 US12108474B2 (en) 2019-09-27 2022-03-25 Dual connectivity management method and communications apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910931116.X 2019-09-27
CN201910931116.XA CN112584550B (zh) 2019-09-27 2019-09-27 一种双连接管理方法和通信装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/704,538 Continuation US12108474B2 (en) 2019-09-27 2022-03-25 Dual connectivity management method and communications apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021057389A1 true WO2021057389A1 (zh) 2021-04-01

Family

ID=75110399

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/112296 Ceased WO2021057389A1 (zh) 2019-09-27 2020-08-29 一种双连接管理方法和通信装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US12108474B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP4027746B1 (zh)
CN (1) CN112584550B (zh)
WO (1) WO2021057389A1 (zh)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230156491A1 (en) * 2021-11-18 2023-05-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatuses and methods for facilitating network connectivity based on identified conditions
CN116233934A (zh) * 2021-12-02 2023-06-06 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种辅设备状态控制方法及相关设备
WO2023205941A1 (zh) * 2022-04-24 2023-11-02 富士通株式会社 信息的发送、接收、配置方法以及装置和通信系统
EP4422247A4 (en) * 2021-10-21 2025-08-27 Ntt Docomo Inc TERMINAL, BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD

Families Citing this family (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR20220102002A (ko) * 2021-01-12 2022-07-19 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 이중 접속을 수행하는 방법 및 장치
CN117223388A (zh) * 2021-05-10 2023-12-12 苹果公司 用于scg激活/去活的承载重新配置
CN117397354A (zh) * 2021-05-18 2024-01-12 联想(北京)有限公司 用于主要辅助小区添加或更改程序的方法及装置
WO2022246616A1 (zh) * 2021-05-24 2022-12-01 华为技术有限公司 数据传输方法及通信装置
CN115551025A (zh) * 2021-06-29 2022-12-30 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 一种信息反馈的方法、装置、芯片及模组设备
US12284169B2 (en) * 2021-07-13 2025-04-22 Omnissa, Llc Accessing corporate resources through an enrolled user device
WO2023000176A1 (zh) * 2021-07-20 2023-01-26 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种控制scg状态的方法及装置、终端设备、网络设备
CN115915095B (zh) * 2021-08-03 2025-01-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 辅小区组的控制方法、装置及终端
CN115707052A (zh) * 2021-08-10 2023-02-17 中国电信股份有限公司 基于双连接配置的通信方法及相关设备
CN116261229A (zh) * 2021-12-09 2023-06-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 能力限制方法、终端及网络侧设备
CN116261205A (zh) * 2021-12-09 2023-06-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 通信方法、装置、终端、网络设备及介质
WO2023121237A1 (en) 2021-12-23 2023-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and user equipment for controlling pdcp aggregation
CN116567861A (zh) * 2022-01-28 2023-08-08 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Scg状态信息处理的方法及装置
CN114554423B (zh) * 2022-03-30 2023-10-20 上海交通大学 一种mbs业务的挂起方法及收发装置
CN116939886A (zh) * 2022-04-12 2023-10-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 双连接功能控制方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备
CN117320190A (zh) * 2022-06-24 2023-12-29 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
EP4550924A4 (en) * 2022-06-28 2025-08-20 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION CONTROL
CN117395793A (zh) * 2022-06-30 2024-01-12 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
CN115843075B (zh) * 2022-11-28 2025-12-09 北京小米移动软件有限公司 显示控制方法、装置、终端设备及存储介质
EP4669019A4 (en) * 2023-02-14 2026-03-25 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NOTIFYING COMMUNICATION RESTORATION TIME, AND STORAGE DEVICE AND MECHANISM

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014162203A2 (en) * 2013-04-03 2014-10-09 Alcatel Lucent Method and apparatus for supporting dual connectivity
US20160277987A1 (en) * 2013-11-01 2016-09-22 Nec Corporation Communication system
CN106686743A (zh) * 2015-11-11 2017-05-17 苹果公司 具有暂停/恢复支持的无线电资源聚合
WO2018174791A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods providing dual connectivity communication and related network nodes and wireless terminals
WO2018182231A1 (en) * 2017-04-01 2018-10-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing mcg recovery in dual connectivity in wireless communication system and a device therefor
WO2019057269A1 (en) * 2017-09-20 2019-03-28 Nokia Technologies Oy METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMED RELATING TO SECONDARY CELL GROUP REACTIVATION IN MULTI-CONNECTIVITY, DOUBLE CONNECTIVITY ACCESS TECHNOLOGY

Family Cites Families (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6299605B2 (ja) * 2013-01-15 2018-03-28 日本電気株式会社 無線通信システム、基地局、移動局、通信制御方法、及びプログラム
CN110536485B (zh) * 2013-09-27 2022-12-23 Sk电信有限公司 支持双连接的用户设备
WO2015066875A1 (zh) * 2013-11-07 2015-05-14 华为技术有限公司 一种激活/去激活次小区的方法、装置和系统
CN106063360B (zh) * 2014-03-28 2020-11-03 富士通株式会社 承载管理装置、方法以及通信系统
WO2016053174A1 (en) * 2014-09-29 2016-04-07 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Indication to the master e-node b of successful primary secondary cell activation in dual connectivity
CN111183706B (zh) * 2017-06-16 2023-11-14 苹果公司 在双重连通中使能非活跃模式的gNB的装置
WO2019032002A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) METHODS OF RESPONSE TO SCG FAILURE IN WIRELESS DC AND TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS AND ASSOCIATED TERMINALS AND NETWORK NODES
CN109429341B (zh) * 2017-08-25 2021-08-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种bwp的去激活控制方法、用户终端及网络侧设备
CN109756994B (zh) * 2017-08-25 2021-06-15 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种终端状态的恢复方法、装置、基站及终端
CN113891353B (zh) 2018-03-01 2024-11-29 华为技术有限公司 通信方法及装置
WO2020251815A1 (en) * 2019-06-14 2020-12-17 Google Llc Saving power in a communication device

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014162203A2 (en) * 2013-04-03 2014-10-09 Alcatel Lucent Method and apparatus for supporting dual connectivity
US20160277987A1 (en) * 2013-11-01 2016-09-22 Nec Corporation Communication system
CN106686743A (zh) * 2015-11-11 2017-05-17 苹果公司 具有暂停/恢复支持的无线电资源聚合
WO2018174791A1 (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-09-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods providing dual connectivity communication and related network nodes and wireless terminals
WO2018182231A1 (en) * 2017-04-01 2018-10-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for performing mcg recovery in dual connectivity in wireless communication system and a device therefor
WO2019057269A1 (en) * 2017-09-20 2019-03-28 Nokia Technologies Oy METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMED RELATING TO SECONDARY CELL GROUP REACTIVATION IN MULTI-CONNECTIVITY, DOUBLE CONNECTIVITY ACCESS TECHNOLOGY

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA, NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "Suspension of SCG", 3GPP DRAFT; R2-1906692 SUSPENDING AND REACTIVATING SCG_, vol. RAN WG2, 17 May 2019 (2019-05-17), Reno, USA, pages 1 - 3, XP051710999 *
See also references of EP4027746A4

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4422247A4 (en) * 2021-10-21 2025-08-27 Ntt Docomo Inc TERMINAL, BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD
US20230156491A1 (en) * 2021-11-18 2023-05-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatuses and methods for facilitating network connectivity based on identified conditions
US12200510B2 (en) * 2021-11-18 2025-01-14 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatuses and methods for facilitating network connectivity based on identified conditions
CN116233934A (zh) * 2021-12-02 2023-06-06 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种辅设备状态控制方法及相关设备
WO2023205941A1 (zh) * 2022-04-24 2023-11-02 富士通株式会社 信息的发送、接收、配置方法以及装置和通信系统

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4027746A1 (en) 2022-07-13
EP4027746B1 (en) 2025-04-23
EP4027746A4 (en) 2022-11-02
US12108474B2 (en) 2024-10-01
CN112584550B (zh) 2023-12-15
CN112584550A (zh) 2021-03-30
US20220217801A1 (en) 2022-07-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021057389A1 (zh) 一种双连接管理方法和通信装置
US11463928B2 (en) Handover method and apparatus
US11212864B2 (en) Method and device for processing non-matching between UE and network state
CN103052116B (zh) 传输速率控制方法、移动性管理实体和通讯系统
US20190349833A1 (en) Information Transmission Method, Base Station, and User Equipment
WO2021026906A1 (zh) 通信方法、通信装置、计算机存储介质及通信系统
KR20190127854A (ko) QoS 처리 방법 및 기기
WO2017193766A1 (zh) 一种下行数据传输的方法及设备
EP3751955A1 (en) Method for activating packet data convergence protocol (pdcp) repetition mechanism and node device
KR20240125916A (ko) 무선 통신을 위한 방법, 디바이스, 및 컴퓨터 프로그램 제품
EP4005276B1 (en) Efficient use of physical and logical resources in dual connectivity
WO2019153928A1 (zh) Rrc状态转换方法、终端、cu、du和计算机可读存储介质
WO2017113130A1 (zh) 一种资源请求方法、设备、网络侧节点及系统
EP3595345A1 (en) Control plane connection management method and device
CN110089193B (zh) 上下文释放方法、设备及系统
WO2023134332A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及系统
WO2021184418A1 (zh) 多连接管理方法及相关产品
KR20240053075A (ko) 지시 방법, 데이터 전송 방법, 통신 노드 및 저장 매체
CN108377522A (zh) 一种信息前转方法及基站
CN110300428A (zh) 用于pdcp复制的bsr触发方法及装置、存储介质、用户设备
CN109788572B (zh) 对sr配置的处理方法及装置、存储介质、终端
JP2025515446A (ja) 通信方法及び装置
WO2022206341A1 (zh) 测量间隙gap的处理方法及相关产品
US12556903B2 (en) Method and apparatus for notifying secondary cell group status information and network-side device
WO2019033945A1 (zh) 一种ue和网络状态不匹配的处理方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20868096

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020868096

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220408

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: 2020868096

Country of ref document: EP